XGB PLC Hardware Users Manual V1.6 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 277

Right choice for ultimate yield

LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your partner.

Programmable Logic Controller

XGB Hardware
XGT Series Users Manual
XBM-DR16S
XBM-DN16S
XBM-DN32S
XBC-DR32H
XBC-DN32H
XBC-DR64H
XBC-DN64H
XBC-DR32HL
XBC-DN32H/DC
XBC-DN64H/DC
XBC-DR32H/DC
XBC-DR64H/DC

z Read this manual carefully before


installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.

z Keep this manual within easy reach


for quick reference.

http://eng.lsis.biz
Safety Instruction

Before using the product

For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.

Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident


or risk with the safe and proper use the product.

Instructions are separated into Warning and Caution, and the meaning of
the terms is as follows;

This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury


Warning or death if some applicable instruction is violated

This symbol indicates the possibility of slight injury


Caution or damage to products if some applicable instruction
is violated

The marks displayed on the product and in the users manual have the
following meanings.

Be careful! Danger may be expected.

Be careful! Electric shock may occur.

The users manual even after read shall be kept available and accessible to
any user of the product.
Safety Instruction

Safety Instructions when designing

Warning

 Please, install protection circuit on the exterior of PLC to protect


the whole control system from any error in external power or PLC
module. Any abnormal output or operation may cause serious problem
in safety of the whole system.
- Install applicable protection unit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the system from physical damage such as emergent stop switch,
protection circuit, the upper/lowest limit switch, forward/reverse
operation interlock circuit, etc.
- If any system error (watch-dog timer error, module installation error,
etc.) is detected during CPU operation in PLC, the whole output is
designed to be turned off and stopped for system safety. However,
in case CPU error if caused on output device itself such as relay or
TR can not be detected, the output may be kept on, which may
cause serious problems. Thus, you are recommended to install an
addition circuit to monitor the output status.

 Never connect the overload than rated to the output module nor
allow the output circuit to have a short circuit, which may cause a
fire.

 Never let the external power of the output circuit be designed to


be On earlier than PLC power, which may cause abnormal output or
operation.

 In case of data exchange between computer or other external


equipment and PLC through communication or any operation of
PLC (e.g. operation mode change), please install interlock in the
sequence program to protect the system from any error. If not, it
may cause abnormal output or operation.
Safety Instruction

Safety Instructions when designing

Caution
 I/O signal or communication line shall be wired at least 100mm
away from a high-voltage cable or power line. If not, it may cause
abnormal output or operation.

Safety Instructions when designing

Caution
 Use PLC only in the environment specified in PLC manual or
general standard of data sheet. If not, electric shock, fire, abnormal
operation of the product or flames may be caused.

 Before installing the module, be sure PLC power is off. If not,


electric shock or damage on the product may be caused.

 Be sure that each module of PLC is correctly secured. If the


product is installed loosely or incorrectly, abnormal operation, error or
dropping may be caused.

 Be sure that I/O or extension connecter is correctly secured. If


not, electric shock, fire or abnormal operation may be caused.

 If lots of vibration is expected in the installation environment,


dont let PLC directly vibrated. Electric shock, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.

 Dont let any metallic foreign materials inside the product, which
may cause electric shock, fire or abnormal operation..
Safety Instruction

Safety Instructions when wiring

Warning
 Prior to wiring, be sure that power of PLC and external power is
turned off. If not, electric shock or damage on the product may be
caused.

 Before PLC system is powered on, be sure that all the covers of
the terminal are securely closed. If not, electric shock may be caused

Caution
 Let the wiring installed correctly after checking the voltage rated
of each product and the arrangement of terminals. If not, fire,
electric shock or abnormal operation may be caused.

 Secure the screws of terminals tightly with specified torque when


wiring. If the screws of terminals get loose, short circuit, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.
*
 Surely use the ground wire of Class 3 for FG terminals, which is
exclusively used for PLC. If the terminals not grounded correctly,
abnormal operation may be caused.

 Dont let any foreign materials such as wiring waste inside the
module while wiring, which may cause fire, damage on the product
or abnormal operation.
Safety Instruction

Safety Instructions for test-operation or repair

Warning
 Dont touch the terminal when powered. Electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.

 Prior to cleaning or tightening the terminal screws, let all the


external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.

 Dont let the battery recharged, disassembled, heated, short or


soldered. Heat, explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire.

Caution
 Dont remove PCB from the module case nor remodel the module.
Fire, electric shock or abnormal operation may occur.

 Prior to installing or disassembling the module, let all the external


power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.

 Keep any wireless installations or cell phone at least 30cm away


from PLC. If not, abnormal operation may be caused.

Safety Instructions for waste disposal

Caution
 Product or battery waste shall be processed as industrial waste.
The waste may discharge toxic materials or explode itself.
Revision History
Version Date Remark Page
V 1.0 2006.6 1. First Edition -

V 1.1 2007.7 1. Position and Special function contents separated


(1) Position function contents separated -
(position part published) -
(2) PID control and Ch. 12 Analog IO module contents
separated

2. Contents added
(1) Naming standard added 2-3 ~ 2-6
(2) Caution when selecting IO module added 7-1 ~ 7-6
(3) IO wiring method by using Smart Link board added 7-27 ~ 7-28
(4) Installation and wiring contents added 10-1 ~ 10-18

3. Content modified
(1) Safety instruction modified 1~6
(2) System Configuration modified 2-7 ~ 2-10
(3) High speed counter function modified 8-6 ~ 8-8
(4) External dimension modified App. 2-1 ~ 2-4

V 1.2 2008.3 1. XGB compact type H type added -

2. Built-in communication content separated Ch. 9


(1) Ch.9 built-in communication function separated
(Cnet I/F user manual)

V1.3 2009.3 1. Specification of output for positioning added 7-13,14,17,18

V1.6 2010.3 1. UL warranty voltage word added 4-6


2. RTC example program modified 6-22
3. XBC input resistor modified and Mixed module I/O 7-26
specification added
4. Installation of module added 9-10
5. DC power unit added Front cover
6. DC power unit and expansion module added 2-1 ~ 2-4
7. DC power unit and expansion module added 4-6 ~ 4-7
8. DC power unit and expansion module added Chapter 7
9. DC power unit and expansion module added Appendix 2
10. Error in high speed counter channel fixed 8-3
11. Specification of TR output for positioning modified 7-13, 14, 17, 18
Version Date Remark Page
12. Error in figure fixed 4-4
13. External memory module added Ch6.13
14. XGB compact type mode added Front cover
15. S, H type max. I/O point modified 2-1 ~ 2-4
16. S, H type max. I/O point modified 4-1 ~ 4-2

The number of Users manual is indicated the right side of the back cover.
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2006 All Rights Reserved.
About Users Manual

About Users Manual


Congratulations on purchasing PLC of LS Industrial System Co.,Ltd.
Before use, make sure to carefully read and understand the Users Manual about the functions,
performances, installation and programming of the product you purchased in order for correct use and
importantly, let the end user and maintenance administrator to be provided with the Users Manual.

The Uses Manual describes the product. If necessary, you may refer to the following description and order
accordingly. In addition, you may connect our website(http://eng.lsis.biz/) and download the information as a
PDF file.

Relevant Users Manual


No. of User
Title Description
Manual
It describes how to use XG5000 software especially about
XG5000 Users
online functions such as programming, printing, monitoring 10310000512
Manual
and debugging by using XGT series products.
XGK/XGB Series It describes how to use the instructions for programming
Instruction & using XGK/XGB series. 10310000510
Programming
It describes how to use the specification of power/input
XGB Hardware
/output/expansion modules, system configuration and built-in 10310000926
Users Manual
High-speed counter for XGB basic unit.
It describes how to use the specification of analog
XGB Analog
input/analog output/temperature input module, system 10310000920
Users Manual
configuration and built-in PID control for XGB basic unit.
XGB Cnet I/F It describes how to use built-in communication function for
10310000816
Users Manual XGB basic unit and external Cnet I/F module.
XGB Fast Ethernet I/F
It describes how to use XGB FEnet I/F module. 10310000873
Users Manual
Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction ...................................................................... 1-1~1-5

1.1 Guide to Use This Manual ....................................................................................... 1-1


1.2 Features................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Terminology ............................................................................................................. 1-4

Chapter 2 System Configuration........................................................... 2-1~2-11

2.1 XGB System Configuration .................................................................................... 2-1


2.2 Product List ............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3 Classification and Type of Product Name .............................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Classification and type of basic unit .........................................................................2-4
2.3.2 Classification and type of expansion module ...........................................................2-5
2.3.3 Classification and type of special module .................................................................2-6
2.3.4 Classification and type of communication module .....................................................2-7
2.4 System Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.1 Cnet I/F system ..........................................................................................................2-8
2.4.2 Ethernet system........................................................................................................2-11

Chapter 3 General Specifications ................................................................. 3-1

3.1 General Specifications ............................................................................................. 3-1

Chapter 4 CPU Specifications ............................................................... 4-1~4-11

4.1 Performance Specifications ................................................................................... 4-1


4.2 Names of Part and Function .................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 Power Supply Specifications .................................................................................. 4-6
4.4 Calculating Example of Consumption Current/Voltage .......................................... 4-8
4.5 Battery .................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.5.1 Battery specification .................................................................................................4-10
4.5.2 Notice in using ..........................................................................................................4-10
4.5.3 Life of battery............................................................................................................4-10
4.5.4 How to change the battery .......................................................................................4-11

Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method.................. 5-1~5-36

5.1 Program Instruction ................................................................................................ 5-1


5.1.1 Program execution methods ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Operation processing during momentary power failure ...........................................5-2
5.1.3 Scan time ..................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.4 Scan Watchdog timer ...............................................................................................5-4
5.1.5 Timer processing ......................................................................................................5-5
5.1.6 Counter processing ..................................................................................................5-8
5.2 Program Execution .............................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.1 Configuration of program ........................................................................................5-10
5.2.2 Program execution methods ....................................................................................5-10
5.2.3 Interrupt . ..................................................................................................................5-12
5.3 Operation Mode ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.3.1 RUN mode ..............................................................................................................5-24
5.3.2 STOP mode ............................................................................................................5-25
5.3.3 DEBUG mode .........................................................................................................5-25
5.3.4 Change operation mode .........................................................................................5-29
5.4 Memory.................................................................................................................. 5-30
5.4.1 Data memory ..........................................................................................................5-30
5.5 Configuration Diagram of Data Memory .............................................................. 5-32
5.5.1 S type .....................................................................................................................5-32
5.5.2 H type .....................................................................................................................5-33
5.5.3 Data latch area setting..............................................................................................5-34

Chapter 6 CPU Functions ...................................................................... 6-1~6-22

6.1 Type Setting ........................................................................................................... 6-1


6.2 Parameter Setting .................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Basic parameter setting ............................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 I/O parameter setting ................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Self-diagnosis Function .......................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Saving of error log ....................................................................................................6-4
6.3.2 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................6-5
6.4 Remote Functions.................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5 Forced Input/Output On and Off Function ............................................................... 6-7
6.5.1 Force I/O setup .........................................................................................................6-7
6.5.2 Processing time and method of Forced Input/Output On and Off ............................6-8
6.6 Direct Input/Output Operation ................................................................................. 6-8
6.7 Diagnosis of External Device .................................................................................. 6-9
6.8 Allocation of Input/Output Number ........................................................................ 6-10
6.9 Online Editing ........................................................................................................ 6-12
6.10 Reading Input/Output Information........................................................................ 6-15
6.11 Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.12 RTC function........................................................................................................ 6-21
6.12.1 How to use ............................................................................................................6-21
6.13 External Memory Module ........................................................................................ 6-23
6.13.1 Structure ...............................................................................................................6-23
6.13.2 How to use ............................................................................................................6-23

Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications ............................................... 7-1~7-28

7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 7-1


7.2 Basic Digital Input Unit Specifications .................................................................... 7-7
7.2.1 XBM-DR16S input unit (Source/Sink type) ................................................................7-7
7.2.2 XBM-DN16S input unit (Source/Sink type) ................................................................7-8
7.2.3 XBM-DN32S input unit (Source/Sink type) ..............................................................7-9
7.2.4 XBC-DR32H / XBC-DN32H input unit (Source/Sink type).......................................7-10
7.2.5 XBC-DR64H / XBC-DN64H input unit (Source/Sink Type)......................................7-11
7.3 Basic Digital Output Unit Specifications ............................................................... 7-12
7.3.1 XBM-DR16S relay output unit..................................................................................7-12
7.3.2 XBM-DN16S transistor output unit (Sink type).........................................................7-13
7.3.3 XBM-DN32S transistor output unit (Sink type).........................................................7-14
7.3.4 XBC-DR32H output unit ...........................................................................................7-15
7.3.5 XBC-DR64H output unit ...........................................................................................7-16
7.3.6 XBC-DN32H output unit (Sink type) ........................................................................7-17
7.3.7 XBC-DN64H output unit (Sink type) ........................................................................7-18
7.4 Digital Input Module Specifications ...................................................................... 7-19
7.4.1 8 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type) ....................................................7-19
7.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type) ..................................................7-20
7.4.3 32 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type) ...................................................7-21
7.5 Digital Output Module Specifications ................................................................... 7-22
7.5.1 8 point relay output module......................................................................................7-22
7.5.2 16 point relay output module....................................................................................7-23
7.5.3 8 point transistor output module (Sink type) ............................................................7-24
7.5.4 16 point transistor output module (Sink type) ..........................................................7-25
7.5.5 32 point transistor output module (Sink type) ..........................................................7-26
7.6 IO Wiring by Using Smart Link Board .................................................................. 7-27
7.6.1 Smart link board .......................................................................................................7-27

Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function .............................. 8-1~8-54

8.1 High-speed Counter Specifications.......................................................................... 8-1


8.1.1 Performance specifications ......................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 Designation of parts ..................................................................................................8-2
8.1.3 S type Functions ..................................................................................................8-6
8.1.4 H type Functions ................................................................................................8-23
8.2 Installation and Wiring .......................................................................................... 8-40
8.2.1 Precaution for wiring ...............................................................................................8-40
8.2.2 Example of wiring ...................................................................................................8-40
8.3 Internal Memory ................................................................................................... 8-41
8.3.1 Special area for High-speed counter ......................................................................8-41
8.3.2 Error code ...............................................................................................................8-49
8.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter ................................................................. 8-50

Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring ........................................................ 9-1~9-17

9.1 Safety Instruction ................................................................................................... 9-1


9.1.1 Fail safe circuit ..........................................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 PLC heat calculation ..................................................................................................9-6
9.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules ...................................................................... 9-8
9.2.1 Attachment/Detachment of modules .......................................................................9-8
9.2.2 Caution in handling ..................................................................................................9-12
9.3 Wire ....................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.3.1 Power wiring.............................................................................................................9-13
9.3.2 I/O Device wiring ......................................................................................................9-16
9.3.3 Grounding wiring ......................................................................................................9-16
9.3.4 Specifications of wiring cable ...................................................................................9-17

Chapter 10 Maintenance .................................................................... 10-1~10-2

10.1 Maintenance and Inspection .............................................................................. 10-1


10.2 Daily Inspection .................................................................................................. 10-1
10.3 Periodic Inspection ............................................................................................. 10-2

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting ............................................................ 11-1~11-12

11.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting ...................................................................11-1


11.2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................11-1
11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the PWR(Power) LED turns Off. ........11-2
11.2.2 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the ERR(Error) LED is flickering .......11-3
11.2.3 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the RUN,STOP LED turns Off. .........11-4
11.2.4 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the I/O part doesnt operate normally..11-5
11.3 Troubleshooting Questionnaire ...........................................................................11-7
11.4 Troubleshooting Examples ..................................................................................11-8
11.4.1 Input circuit troubles and corrective actions .........................................................11-8
11.4.2 Output circuit and corrective actions ......................................................................11-9
11.5 Error Code List....................................................................................................11-11

Appendix 1 Flag List ........................................................... App. 1-1~App.1-10

Appendix 1.1 Special Relay (F) List....................................................................... App. 1-1


Appendix 1.2 Communication Relay (L) List.......................................................... App. 1-6
Appendix 1.3 Network Register (N) List ............................................................. App. 1-10
Appendix 2 Dimension............................................................. App.2-1~App.2-5

Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K ............................ App.3-1~App.3-5

Appendix 4 Instruction List ................................................... App.4-1~App.4-40

Appendix 4.1 Classification of Instructions ............................................................. App.4-1


Appendix 4.2 Basic Instructions ............................................................................ App.4-2
Appendix 4.3 Application Instruction ..................................................................... App.4-5
Appendix 4.4 Special/Communication Instruction............................................... App.4-37
Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Guide to Use This Manual
This manual includes specifications, functions and handling instructions for the XGB series PLC.
This manual is divided up into chapters as follows.

No. Title Contents


Describes configuration of this manual, units features and
Chapter 1 Introduction
terminology.
Describes available units and system configuration in the XGB
Chapter 2 System Configurations
series.
Describes general specifications of units used in the XGB
Chapter 3 General Specifications
series.

Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

Program Configuration and


Chapter 5 Describes performances, specifications and operations.
Operation Method

Chapter 6 CPU Module Functions

Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications Describes operation of basic and input/output.

Built-in High-speed Counter


Chapter 8 Describes built-in high-speed counter functions.
Function
Describes installation, wiring and handling instructions for
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
reliability of the PLC system.
Describes the check items and method for long-term normal
Chapter 10 Maintenance
operation of the PLC system.

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Describes various operation errors and corrective actions.

Appendix 1 Flag List Describes the types and contents of various flags.

Appendix 2 Dimension Shows dimensions of the main units and expansion modules.

Compatibility with
Appendix 3 Describes the compatibility with MASTER-K.
MASTER-K

Appendix 4 Instruction List Describes the special relay and instruction list.

1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.2 Features
The features of XGB system are as follows.

(1) The system secures the following high performances.


(a) High Processing Speed
(b) Max. 384 I/O control supporting small & mid-sized system implementation
Type
Item Reference
XBM-DxxxS XBC-DxxxH
Operation processing
160ns / Step 120ns / Step -
speed
Max IO contact point 256 points 384 points
Program capacity 10Kstep 15Kstep -
Max. no. of expanded
7 10 -
base

(c) Enough program capacity


(d) Expanded applications with the support of floating point.
(e) XBM-DxxxS is expressed S type and XBC-DxxxH is expressed H type.
(2) Compact : the smallest size comparing to the same class model of competitors.
(a) Compact panel realized through the smallest size.

Item Type Size (W * H * D) Reference

XBC-Dx32H 114 * 90 * 64
H type
Basic unit XBC-Dx64H 180 * 90 * 64
XBM-DxxxS 30 * 90 * 64 S type
Extension module XBE-,XBF-,XBL- 20 * 90 * 60 Basis of minimum size

(3) Easy attachable/extensible system for improved user convenience.


(a) Easy attachable to European terminal board and convenient-to-use MIL connector method improving
convenient wiring. (S type basic unit and expanded module)
(b) By adopting a removable terminal block connector (M3 X 6 screw), convenience of wiring may be
increased.
(c) By adopting connector coupling method, modules may be easily connected and separated.

(4) Improved maintenance ability with kinds of register, built-in RTC (H type), comment backup and etc
(a) Convenient programming environment by providing analogue register and index register.
(b) Improved maintenance ability by operating plural programs and task program through module program.
(c) Built-in Flash ROM enabling permanent backup of program without any separate battery.
(d) Improved maintenance ability by types of comment backup.
(e) Built-in RTC function enabling convenient history and schedule management

1-2
Chapter 1 Introduction

(5) Optimized communication environment.


(a) With max. 2 channels of built-in COM (excl. loader), up to 2 channel communication is available without
any expanded of module.
(b) Supporting various protocols to improve the convenience (dedicated, Modbus, user-defined
communication)
(c) Communication module may be additionally increased by adding modules (up to 2 stages such as Cnet,
Enet and etc).
(d) Convenient network-diagnostic function through network & communication frame monitoring.
(e) Convenient networking to upper systems through Enet or Cnet.
(f) High speed program upload and download by USB Port

(6) Applications expanded with a variety of I/O modules.


(a) 8, 16, 32 points modules provided (if relay output, 8/16 points module).
(b) Single input, single output and combined I/O modules supported.

(7) Applications expanded through analog-dedicated register design and full attachable mechanism.
(a) All analogue modules can be attachable on extension base. (H type: up to 10 stages available)
(b) With analog dedicated register(U) and monitoring dedicated function, convenient use for I/O is
maximized (can designate operations using easy programming of U area and monitoring function)

(8) Integrated programming environment


(a) XG 5000: intensified program convenience, diverse monitoring, diagnosis and editing function
(b) XG - PD: COM/network parameters setting, frame monitoring, protocol analysis function

(9) Built-in high speed counter function


(a) Providing High-speed counter 1phase, 2phase and more additional functions.
(b) Providing parameter setting, diverse monitoring and diagnosis function using XG5000.
(c) Monitoring function in XG5000 can inspect without program, inspecting external wiring, data setting and
others.

(10) Built-in position control function


(a) Supporting max 100Kpps 2 axes.
(b) Providing parameter setting, operation data collection, diverse monitoring and diagnosis by using
XG5000.
(c) Commissioning by monitoring of XG5000, without program, inspecting external wiring and operation data
setting.

1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction

(11) Built-in PID


(a) Supporting max. 16 loops.
(b) Setting parameters by using XG5000 and supporting loop status monitoring conveniently with trend
monitor.
(c) Control constant setting through the improved Auto-tuning function.
(d) With many other additional functions including PWM output, MV, PV and SV Ramp, improving the
control preciseness.
(e) Supporting types of control modes such as forward/backward mixed operation, 2-stage SV PID control,
cascade control and etc.
(f) A variety of warning functions such as PV MAX and PV variation warning securing the safety.

1.3 Terminology
The following table gives definition of terms used in this manual.

Terms Definition Remark


Example)
A standard element that has a specified function which configures Expansion module,
Module the system. Devices such as I/O board, which inserted onto the Special module,
mother board. Communication
module
Example)
A single module or group of modules that perform an Main unit,
Unit
independent operation as a part of PLC systems. Expansion unit

A system which consists of the PLC and peripheral devices.


PLC System -
A user program can control the system.

A program and debugging tool for the MASTER-K series.


XG5000 It executes program creation, edit, compile and debugging. -
(PADT: Programming Added Debugging Tool)
Software to execute description, edition of basic parameter, high
XG - PD speed link, P2P parameter, and function of communication
diagnosis -
Internal memory area of the CPU module which used to hold I/O
I/O image area
status.
Cnet Computer Network -
FEnet Fast Ethernet Network -
Pnet Profibus-DP Network -
Dnet DeviceNet Network -

Abbreviation of Real Time Clock. It is used to call general IC that


RTC -
contains clock function.

Supervisors the pre-set execution times of programs and warns if


Watchdog Timer -
a program is not competed within the pre-set time.

1-4
Chapter 1 Introduction

Terms Definition Remark

Current flows from the switch to the PLC input terminal if a input
signal turns on.

Z: Input
Sink Input
impedance

Current flows from the PLC input terminal to the switch after a
input signal turns on.

Source Input -

Current flows from the load to the output terminal and the PLC
output turn on.

Sink Output -
Output
Contact

Current flows from the output terminal to the load and the PLC
output turn on.

Source Output -

1-5
Chapter 2 System Configuration

Chapter 2 System Configuration


The XGB series has suitable to configuration of the basic, computer link and network systems.
This chapter describes the configuration and features of each system.

2.1 XGB System Configuration

XGB series System Configuration is as follows. Expanded I/O module and special module are available to
connect maximum 7 stages for S type and 10 stages for H type. Expanded communication module is
available to connect maximum 2 stages.

Main Unit I/O Module Special Module Communication Module

2-1
Chapter 2 System Configuration

Item Description

XBC-DxxxH (H type): 32~384 points


Total I/O points
XBM-DxxxS (S type): 16~256 points
Digital I/O module S type: Max. 7 / H type: Max. 10
Maximum number of
A/DD/A module S type: Max. 7 / H type: Max. 10
expansion
Communication I/F
modules Maximum 2
module
XBC-DR32H(/DC) XBC-DN32H(/DC) XBC-DR32HL
H type
Main unit XBC-DR64H(/DC) XBC-DN64H(/DC)
S type XBM-DR16S XBM-DN16/32S
XBE-DC08/16/32/64A
XBE-TN08/16/32/64A
Digital I/O module
XBE-TP08/16/32/64A
Items XBE-RY08/16A XBE-DR16A
Expansion XBF-AD04A XBF-RD04A
module A/DD/A module XBF-DV04A XBF-RD01A
XBF-DC04A XBF-TC04S
Communication I/F XBL-C41A XBL-241A
module XBL-EMTA

2-2
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.2 Product List


XGB series product list is as follows.
Types Model Description Remark
XBC-DR32H AC100~220V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Relay output 16 point
XBC-DN32H AC100~220V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point
XBC-DR64H AC100~220V power supply, DC24V input 32 point, Relay output 32 point

XBC-DN64H AC100~220V power supply, DC24V input 32 point, Transistor output 32 point
H type
XBC-DR32HL AC100~220V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, relay output 16 point
Main Unit

XBC-DR32H/DC DC 24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, relay output 16 point
XBC-DN32H/DC DC 24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, TR output 16 point
XBC-DR64H/DC DC 24V power supply, DC24V input 32 point, relay output 32 point
XBC-DN64H/DC DC 24V power supply, DC24V input 32 point, TR output 32 point
XBM-DN16S DC24V Power supply, DC24V Input 8 point, Transistor output 8 point
XBM-DN32S DC24V Power supply, DC24V Input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point S type

XBM-DR16S DC24V Power supply, DC24V Input 8 point, Relay output 8 point
XBE-DC08A DC24V Input 8 point -
XBE-DC16A DC24V Input 16 point -
XBE-DC32A DC24V Input 32 point -
XBE-RY08A Relay output 8 point -
Expansion Unit

XBE-RY16A Relay output 16 point -


XBE-TN08A Transistor output 8 point (sink type) -
XBE-TN16A Transistor output 16 point (sink type) -
XBE-TN32A Transistor output 32 point (sink type) -
XBE-TP08A Transistor output 8 point (source type) -
XBE-TP16A Transistor output 16 point (source type) -
XBE-TP32A Transistor output 32 point (source type) -
XBE-DR16A DC24V Input 8 point, Relay output 8 point -
XBF-AD04A Current/Voltage input 4 channel -
Special Module

XBF-DC04A Current output 4 channel -


XBF-DV04A Voltage output 4 channel -
XBF-RD04A RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 4 channel -

XBF-RD01A RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 1 channel -

XBF-TC04S TC (Thermocouple) input 4 channel -

XBL-C21A Cnet (RS-232C/Modem) I/F -


Communication

XBL-C41A Cnet (RS-422/485) I/F -


Module

XBL-EMTA Enet I/F -


Coming
XBL-EIMT RAPIEnet I/F
soon

2-3
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.3 Classification and Type of Product Name

2.3.1 Classification and type of basic unit


Name of basic unit is classified as follows.

X B M - D R XX S

XGB PLC standard (S)

XGB PLC XGB PLC High-end type (H)

No. of I/O point


MK language supported (B)
IEC language supported (E)
Relay output (R)

Sink type transistor output (N)


Module type basic unit (M)
Source type transistor output (P)
Compact type basic unit(C)

DC input

Classification Name DC input Relay output Transistor output Power

XBM-DR16S 8 point 8 point None


Module type
XBM-DN16S 8 point None 8 point DC24V
basic unit
XBM-DN32S 16 point None 16 point

XBC-DR32H 16 point 16 point None

XBC-DN32H 16 point None 16 point

XBC-DR64H 32 point 32 point None AC110V~220V


XBC-DN64H 32 point None 32 point
Compact type
XBC-DR32HL 16 point 16 point None
basic unit
XBC-DR32H/DC 16 point 16 point None

XBC-DN32H/DC 16 point None 16 point


DC24V
XBC-DR64H/DC 32 point 32 point None

XBC-DN64H/DC 32 point None 32 point

2-4
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.3.2 Classification and type of expansion module

Name of expansion module is classified as follows.

X B E - DC XX A

XGB series No. of I/O point

I/O expansion module Relay output(RY)

Transistor output (TN/TP)

Digital input (DC)

Digital input+ sink type transistor output (DN)

Digital input+ source type transistor output (DP)

Name DC input Relay output Transistor output Reference

XBE-DC08A 8 point None None

XBE-RY08A None 8 point None


8 point
XBE-TN08A None None
(sink type)
8 point
XBE-TP08A None None
(source type)
XBE-DC16A 16 point None None

XBE-RY16A None 16 point None


16 point
XBE-TN16A None None
(sink type)
16 point
XBE-TP16A None None
(source type)
XBE-DR16A 8 point 8 point None

XBE-DC32A 32 point None None


32 point
XBE-TN32A None None
(sink type)
32 point
XBE-TP32A None None
(source type)
64 point
XBE-TN64A None None
(sink type)
64 point
XBE-TP64A None None
(source type)
XBE-DC64A 64 point None None

2-5
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.3.3 Classification and type of special module

Special module is classified as follows.

X B F - AD XX A

Non-insulation type (A)

Insulation type (S)


XGB series
No. of IO point

Expansion special module Analog input (AD)

Analog voltage output (DC)

Analog current output (DV)

RTD input (RD)


Thermocouple input (TC)

No. of input No. of Output


Classification Name Input type
ch. output ch. type
Analog input XBF-AD04A 4 Voltage/Current None -

XBF-DC04A None - 4 Current


Analog output
XBF-DV04A None - 4 Voltage

XBF-RD04A 4 PT100/JPT100 None -


RTD input
XBF-RD01A 1 PT100/JPT100 None -

TC input XBF-TC04S 4 K, J, T, R None -

2-6
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.3.4 Classification and type of communication module

Name of communication module is classified as follows.

X B L - C21

Cnet 1 channel (RS-232C): C21A


XGB series Cnet 1 channel (RS-422/485): C41A

FEnet 1 channel: EMTA


RAPIEnet 1 channel: EIMT
Expansion communication module

Classification Name Type


XBL-C21A RS-232C, 1 channel
Cnet Comm. Module
XBL-C41A RS-422/485, 1 channel
FEnet Comm. Module XBL-EMTA Electricity, open type Ethernet
Comm. Module between PLCs, electric media,
RAPIEnet Comm. Module XBL-EIMT
100 Mbps industrial Ethernet supported

2-7
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.4 System Configuration

2.4.1 Cnet I/F system

Cnet I/F System is used for communication between the main unit and external devices using RS-
232C/RS-422 (485) Interface. The XGB series has a built-in RS-232C port, RS-485 port and has also
XBL-C21A for RS-232C, XBL-C41A for RS-422/485. It is possible to construct communication systems
on demand.

1) 1:1 communication system

(1) 1:1 communication of an external device (computer) with main unit using a built-in port
(RS-232C/RS-485)

XBC-DR32H

RS-232C / RS-485

(2) 1:1 communication with main unit using a built-in RS-485 port
(In case of built-in RS-232C,it is for connecting to HMI device.)

Built-in RS-485 Connection

XBC-DR32H XBM-DN32S

PADT
connection

Built-in RS-232C Connection

XP30-TTA

2-8
Chapter 2 System Configuration

(3) 1:1 RS-232C Communication with remote device via modem by Cnet I/F modules

XBM-DN32S XBL-C21A XBM-DN32S XBL-C21A

Modem
Modem

XBC-DR32H XBL-C21A

Modem

Modem

(4) 1:1 communication of an external device (monitoring unit) with main unit using a built-in RS-
232C/485 port.

XP30-TTA

Built-in RS-232C/485 connection

2-9
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2) 1:n Communication system

(1) Using RS-485 built-in function can connect between one computer and multiple main units for up
to 32 stations.
XBC-DN32H
XBM-DN32S XBM-DR16S XBM-DN32S

PADT connection

Can be connected
Max. 32 stations

Built-in RS-232C
Connection

(2) Using RS-485 built-in function/expansion Cnet I/F module can be connect for up to 32 stations.

XBC-DN32H XBL-C41A
XBL-C41A XBL-C41A
XBM-DN32S XBM-DN16S

PADT Connection
Can be connected
Max. 32 stations

Can be connected
Max. 32 stations

Built-in RS-232C connection

Note

1) Refer to XGB Cnet I/F user manual for details

2-10
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2.4.2 Ethernet system

Ethernet made by cooperation of Xerox, Intel, DEC is standard LAN connection method (IEEE802.3),
which is network connection system using 1.5KB packet with 100Mbps transmission ability. Since
Ethernet can combine a variety of computer by network, it is called as standard specification of LAN and
diverse products. By adopting CSMA/CD method, it is easy to configure the network and collect large
capacity data.

Router or
Gateway
Hub
M

Public line

Router or Hub
Gateway H
HMI
Hub Hub

100Base-TX

HMI

Note

1) Refer to XGB FEnet I/F user manual for details

2-11
Chapter 3 General Specifications

Chapter 3 General Specifications

3.1 General Specifications

The General specification of XGB series is as below.

No. Items Specification Reference


1 Ambient Temp. 0 ~ 55 C
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~ +70 C
3 Ambient humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing) -
4 Storage humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)
Occasional vibration -
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width Times
10 f < 57Hz 0.075mm
57 f 150Hz 9.8m/s2 (1G) 10 times
5 Vibration
Continuous vibration each
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width direction
IEC61131-2
10 f < 57Hz 0.035mm (X,Y and Z)
57 f 150Hz 4.9m/s2 (0.5G)
Peak acceleration : 147 m/s (15G)
2

6 Shocks Duration : 11ms


Pulse wave type : Half-sine (3 times each direction per each axis)
Square wave
1,500 V LSIS standard
impulse noise
Electrostatic IEC61131-2
Voltage: 4kV (Contact discharge)
discharge IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
7 Impulse noise IEC61131-2,
electromagnetic 27 ~ 500 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61000-4-3
field noise
Classifi- Power Digital/Analog Input/Output,
Fast transient IEC61131-2
cation supply Communication Interface
/Burst noise IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
Operation
8 Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
ambience
9 Altitude Less than 2,000m -
10 Pollution degree Less than 2
11 Cooling method Air-cooling

Notes

1) IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)


: An international civil community that promotes international cooperation for standardization of
electric/ electro technology, publishes international standard and operates suitability assessment
system related to the above.
2) Pollution Degree
: An index to indicate the pollution degree of used environment that determines the insulation
performance of the device. For example, pollution degree 2 means the state to occur the pollution of
non-electric conductivity generally, but the state to occur temporary electric conduction according to
the formation of dew.

3-1
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

Chapter 4 CPU Specifications


4.1 Performance Specifications
The following table shows the general specifications of the XGB module type CPU.
Specifications (S type)
Items Remark
XBM-DR16S XBM-DN16S XBM-DN32S
Cyclic execution of stored program, Time-driven interrupt,
Program control method
Process-driven interrupt
Batch processing by simultaneous scan (Refresh method),
I/O control method
Directed by program instruction
Program language Ladder Diagram, Instruction List
Number of Basic 28
instructions Application 677
Processing speed
0.16 /Step
(Basic instruction)
Program capacity 10 ksteps
-
Max. I/O points 240 point (Main + Expansion 7 stages) 256 point
P P0000 ~ P127F (2,048 point)
M M0000 ~ M255F (4,096 point)
K K00000 ~ K2559F (Special area: K2600~2559F) (40,960 point)
L L00000 ~ L1279F (20,480 point)
F F000 ~ F255F (4,096 point)
100ms, 10ms, 1ms : T000 ~ T255
T
Data area (Adjustable by parameter setting)
C C000 ~ C255
S S00.00 ~ S127.99
D D0000 ~ D5119 (5120 word)
U U00.00 ~ U07.31 (Analog data refresh area: 256 word)
Word
Z Z000~Z127 (128 Word)
N N0000~N3935 (3936 Word)
Total program 128
Initial task 1 (_INT)
Cyclic task Max. 8
I/O task Max. 8
Internal device task Max. 8
Operation mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG -
Self-diagnosis function Detects errors of scan time, memory, I/O and power supply
Program port RS-232C (Loader)
Back-up method Latch area setting in basic parameter
Internal consumption current 400 mA 250 mA 280 mA
Weight 140 g 100 g 110 g

4- 1
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

The following table shows the general specifications of the XGB compact type CPU (XBC-DR32/64H,
XBC-DN32/DN64).
Specifications (H type)
Items XBC-DN32H XBC-DR32H XBC-DN64H XBC-DR64H XBC- Remark
(/DC) (/DC) (/DC) (/DC) DR32HL
Cyclic execution of stored program, Time-driven interrupt,
Program control method Process-driven interrupt
Batch processing by simultaneous scan (Refresh method),
I/O control method
Directed by program instruction
Program language Ladder Diagram, Instruction List
Number of Basic 28
instructions Application 687
Processing speed
0.12 /Step
(Basic instruction)
Program capacity 15 Kstep 30kstep
352 point (Main + Expansion 10 384 point (Main + Expansion 10 -
Max. I/O points 352 point
stages) stages)

P P0000 ~ P1023F (16,384 point)


M M0000 ~ M1023F (16,384 point)
K K0000 ~ K4095F (65,536 point)
L L0000 ~ L2047F (32,768 point)
F F0000 ~ F1023F (16,384 point)
100ms, 10ms, 1ms : T0000 ~ T1023 (1,024 point)
T
(Adjustable by parameter setting)
Data area C C0000 ~ C1023 (1,024)
S S00.00 ~ S127.99
D D0000 ~ D10239 (10,240 word)
U U00.00 ~ U0A.31 (Analog data refresh area: 352 word)
Z Z000~Z127 (128 Word) Word
N N0000~N5119 (5,120 Word)
R R0000~R10239 (10,240 Word)
Total program 128
Initial task 1 (_INT)
Cyclic task Max. 8
I/O task Max. 8
Internal device task Max. 8 -
Operation mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG
Self-diagnosis function Detects errors of scan time, memory, I/O and power supply
Program port RS-232C 1 channel, USB 1 channel (USB 1.1 supported)
Back-up method Latch area setting in basic parameter
Internal consumption current 260 mA 660 mA 330 mA 1,040 660 mA
mA
Weight 500 g 600 g 800 g 900 g 600 g

4- 2
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

Specifications
Items Remark
S type H type
Controlled by instructions, Auto-tuning, PWM output, Manual
PID control function output, Adjustable operation scan time, Anti Windup, Delta MV
function, SV-Ramp function
Dedicated protocol support
MODBUS protocol support RS-232C 1 port
Cnet I/F function
User defined protocol support RS-485 1 port

1 phase: 100 kHz 4 channel,


1 phase: 20 kHz 4 channel 20kHz 4 channel
Capacity 2 phase: 10 kHz 2 channel 2 phase: 50 kHz 2 channel, 10kHz
2 channel
4 different counter modes according to input pulse and
High-speed counter

-
addition/subtraction method
1 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter
Counter 1 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter by B
mode phase
2 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter
2 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction by
phase differences
Internal/External preset function
Additional Latch counter function
function Comparison output function
Revolution number per unit time function
No. of control axis: 2 axes No. of control axis: 2 axes
Built-in function

Control method: position/speed Control method: position/speed


control control
Control unit: pulse Control unit: pulse
Positioning data: 30 data/axis Positioning data: 80 data/axis
Basic function
(operation step No. 1~30) (operation step No. 1~80)
Operation mode: End/Keep/ Operation mode:
Positioning function

Continuous End/Keep/Continuous
Operation method: Single, Operation method: Single,
Repeated operation Repeated operation
Positioning method: Absolute / Incremental TR output
Positioning Address range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 type support
function Speed: Max. 100Kpps(setting range 1 ~ 100,000pps)
Acceleration / Deceleration method : trapezoidal method
Origin detection when approximate origin turns off
Return to Origin
Origin detection when approximate origin turns on
Origin detection by approximate origin.
JOG operation Setting range: 1~100,000 ( High / Low speed)
Inching operation, Speed synchronizing operation,
Additional
Position synchronizing operation, linear interpolation
function
operation etc.
10 4 point
50 (P0000 ~ P0003)
Pulse catch
8 point (P0000 ~ P0007) 50 4 point
(P0004 ~ P0007)
10 4 point -
8 point: 50 (P0000 ~ P0003)
External interrupt
(P0000 ~ P0007) 50 4 point
(P0004 ~ P0007)
Input filter Select among 1,3,5,10,20,70,100 (Adjustable)

4- 3
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

4.2 Names of Part and Function

S Type
XBM-DN16S
XBM-DN32S XBM-DR16S

8-1
8-3
8-2

No. Name Description

Input indicator LED Input indicator LED

PADT connecting
connector
PADT connecting connector

Input connector and


terminal block
Input connector and terminal block
Output connector and
terminal block
Output connector and terminal block
RUN / STOP Key switch
Key switch
In case of STOP mode, Remote mode changeable.
Output indicator LED Output indicator LED

It indicates CPU modules status.


PWR(Red): Power status
Status indicator LED RUN(Green): RUN status
STOP mode: Off/ RUN mode : On
Error(Red): In case of error, it is flickering.

4- 4
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

No. Name Description


Built-in RS-485
y Built-in RS-485 connecting connector
8-1 connecting
- + , - terminal connecting connector in RS-485 communication
connector
Built-inRS-232C y Built-in RS-232C connecting connector
8-2 connecting - TxD , RxD , GND terminal connecting connector in RS-232C
connector communication
Power supply
8-3 y Power supply connector (24V)
connector

H Type

8-1

8-2
No. Name Description

Input indicator LED Input indicator LED


PADT connecting PADT connecting USB (USB 1.1 supported) 1 channel,
connector RS-232C 1 channel connector
Input connector and
terminal block
Input connector and terminal block
Output connector and
terminal block
Output connector and terminal block
RUN / STOP Key switch
Key switch
In case of STOP mode, Remote mode changeable.
Output indicator LED Output indicator LED
It indicates CPU modules status.
PWR(Red): Power status
Status indicator LED RUN(Green): RUN status
STOP mode: Off/ RUN mode : On
Error(Red): In case of error, it is flickering.
Built-in RS-232C y Built-in RS-485 connecting connector
/ RS-485 + , - terminal connecting connector in RS-485 communication
8-1
Connecting Built-in RS-232C connecting connector
connector TxD , RxD , GND connecting connector in RS-232C
Power supply
8-2 AC100~240V power supply connector
connector
Battery holder Battery (3V) holder
Mode switch Program mode and O/S download mode select switch

4- 5
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

4.3 Power Supply Specifications


It describes the power supply specification of main unit.
Items Specification (S type)

Rated voltage DC24V

Input voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (-15%, +20%)

Inrush current 70APeak or less


Input Input current 1A (Typ.550 )
Efficiency 60% or more
Permitted momentary
Less than 10
power failure
Output voltage DC5V (2%)
Output
Output current 1.5 A

Power supply status indication LED On when power supply is normal

Cable specification 0.75 ~ 2 mm2

Specification ( H type)
XBC-
Items XBC-DR64H, XBC-DR32H/DC, XBC-DR64H/DC,
DR32H(/HL),
XBC-DN64H XBC-DN32H/DC XBC-DN64H/DC
XBC-DN32H

Rated voltage
AC 100 ~ 240 V DC 24V
(UL warranty voltage)
Input voltage range AC85~264V(-15%, +10%) DC19.2~28.8V(-20%, +20%)

Inrush current 50APeak or less


Input AC 220V : 0.5A or less,
Input current 0.7A or less 1A or less
AC 110V : 1A or less
Efficiency 65% or more
Permitted momentary
Less than 10
power failure
Rated DC5V 2A 3A 2A 3A
Output output DC24V 0.4A 0.6A - -
Output voltage ripple DC5V (2%)

Power supply status indication LED On when power supply is normal

Cable specification 0.75 ~ 2 mm2


* Use the power supply which has 4 A or more fuse for protecting power supply.

4- 6
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

1) Consumption current (DC 5V)

Item Model Current consumption

XBM-DR16S 400
XBM-DN16S 250
XBM-DN32S 280
XBC-DR32H(/HL) 660
XBC-DR64H 1,040
Main unit XBC-DN32H 260
XBC-DN64H 330
XBC-DR32H/DC 660
XBC-DR64H/DC 1,040
XBC-DN32H/DC 260
XBC-DN64H/DC 330
XBE-DC32A 50
XBE-DC16A 30
XBE-DC08A 20
XBE-RY16A 440
XBE-RY08A 240
XBE-TN32A 80
Expansion I/O module
XBE-TN16A 50
XBE-TN08A 40
XBE-TP32A 80
XBE-TP16A 50
XBE-TP08A 40
XBE-DR16A 250
XBF-AD04A 120
XBF-DV04A 110
XBF-DC04A 110
Expansion special module
XBF-RD04A 100
XBF-RD01A 100
XBF-TC04S 100
XBL-C21A 110
Expansion communication
XBL-C41A 110
module
XBL-EMTA 190

4- 7
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

4.4 Calculation Example of Consumption Current/Voltage


Calculate the consumption current and configure the system not to exceed the output current capacity of
basic unit.

(1) XGB PLC configuration example 1


Consumption of current/voltage is calculated as follows.
Internal 5V
consumption
Type Model Unit No. Remark
current
(Unit : )
Main unit XBM-DN16S 1 250
In case contact points are On.
XBE-DC32A 2 50
(Maximum consumption current)
XBE-TN32A 2 80
Expansion
XBF-AD04A 1 120
module
All channel is used.
XBF-DC04A 1 110
(Maximum consumption current)
XBL-C21A 1 110
Consumption
830 -
current
Consumption
4.25 W 0.85 * 5V = 4.25W
voltage

In case system is configured as above, since 5V consumption current is total 850mA and 5V output of XGB
standard type main unit is maximum 1.5A, normal system configuration is available.

(2) XGB PLC configuration example 2


Internal 5V
consumption
Type Model Unit No. Remark
current
(Unit : )
Main unit XBM-DR16S 1 400
In case all contact points are On.
XBE-DR16A 3 250
(Maximum consumption current)
Expansion XBE-TN32A 2 80
module XBF-AD04A 1 120 All channel is used.
XBL-C21A 1 110 (Maximum consumption current)
Consumption
1,540 -
current
Consumption
7.7W 1.54 * 5V = 7.7W
voltage

If system is configured as above, total 5V current consumption is exceeded 1,540 mA and it exceeds the 5V
output of XGB standard type main unit. Normal system configuration is not available. Although we assume
the above example that all contact points are on, please use high-end type main unit which 5V output
capacity is higher than standard type main unit.

4- 8
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

(3) XGB PLC configuration example 3


Internal 5V
consumption
Type Model Unit No. Remark
current
(Unit : )
Main unit XBC-DR32H 1 660 In case of all contact points are
XBE-DR16A 3 250 On.
(Maximum consumption current)
Expansion XBE-TN32A 2 80
module XBF-AD04A 1 120 All channel is used.
XBL-C21A 1 110 (Maximum consumption current)
Consumption
1,800 -
current
Consumption
9W 1.8 * 5V = 9W
voltage

The above system is an example using XBC-DR32H about system example (2). Unlike (2) example, 5V
output capacity of XBC-DR32H is maximum 2A, normal configuration is available.

Remark
Calculating of consumption current is based on maximum consumption current. In application system,
the consumption current is consumed less than above calculation.

4- 9
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

4.5 Battery
This contents is only applied to H type.
4.5.1 Battery specification

Item Specification
Voltage/Current DC 3V / 220 mA
Warranty period 3 years (ambient temp.)
Program and data backup,
Purpose
RTC operation in case of power failure
Specification Manganese Dioxide lithium battery
Dimension (mm) 20 X 3.2 mm

4.5.2 Notice in using


(1) Do not heat the battery or solder the polarity. ( It may cause the reduction of life.)
(2) Do not measure the voltage or short with tester. (It may cause the fire.)
(3) Do not disassemble the battery.

4.5.3 Life of battery


Life of battery depends on the power failure time and ambient temperature etc..
If battery is getting low, main unit cause the warning, battery voltage low warning. The user can check it
by error LED, flag and error message of XG5000.
Since battery works properly for long time, after battery voltage low warning, so the user can take the
action after battery voltage low warning occurred.

4- 10
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications

4.5.4 How to change the battery


The user should change the battery used to save the program and backup the data in case of power
failure periodically. Though the user eliminate the battery, it works for 30 minute by super capacitor.
Change the battery as fast as possible.

Sequence changing battery is as follows.

Start of battery change

Open battery cover

Pick up using battery from holder and


disassemble the connector

Insert new battery and connect to


connector with proper direction

Check the LED whether ERR LED is off

Yes
ERR LED off?

No
Battery malfunction Complete

4- 11
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method


5.1 Program Instruction

5.1.1 Program execution methods


1) Cyclic operation method (Scan)
This is a basic program proceeding method of PLC that performs the operation repeatedly for the prepared
program from the beginning to the last step, which is called program scan. The series of processing like
this is called cyclic operation method. The processing is divided per stage as below.

Stage Processing description

Start -

y A stage to start the scan processing which is executed once


Initialization processing when power is applied or Reset is executed, as below.
Self-diagnosis execution
Data clear
Address allocation of I/O module and type register
y If initializing task is designated, Initializing program is executed.

y Reads the state of input module and saves it in input image


Input image area refresh area before starting the operation of program.

Program operation processing


Program start y Performs the operation in order from the program start to last
step.

Program last step

y Performs the operation in order from the program start to last step.
Output image area refresh

y A processing stage to return to the first step after CPU module


completes 1 scan processing and the processing performed is as
END
below.
Update the current value of timer and counter etc.
User event, data trace service
Self-diagnosis
High speed link, P2P e-Service
Check the state of key switch for mode setting

5-1
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

2) Interrupt operation (Cycle time, Internal device)


This is the method that stops the program operation in proceeding temporarily and carries out the
operation processing which corresponds to interrupt program immediately in case that there occurs the
status to process emergently during PLC program execution.
The signal to inform this kind of urgent status to CPU module is called interrupt signal. There is a Cycle
time signal that operates program every appointed time and external interrupt signal that operates program
by external contact (I/O; P000~P007). Besides, there is an internal device start program that starts
according to the state change of device assigned inside.
3) Constant Scan (Fixed Period)
This is the operation method that performs the scan program every appointed time. This stands by for a
while after performing all the scan program, and starts again the program scan when it reaches to the
appointed time. The difference from constant program is the update of input/output and the thing to
perform with synchronization.
At constant operation, the scan time indicates the net program processing time where the standby time is
deducted. In case that scan time is bigger than constant, [F0005C] _CONSTANT_ER flag shall be ON.

5.1.2 Operation processing during momentary power failure


CPU module detects the momentary power failure when input power voltage supplied to power module is
lower than the standard. If CPU module detects the momentary power failure , it carries out the operation
processing as follows.
If momentary power failure within 10 ms is occurred, main unit (CPU) keeps the operation. But, if
momentary power failure above 10 , the operation is stop and the output is Off. Restart processing
like at power input shall be performed.

1) Momentary power failure within 10 ms

y CPU keeps the operation.


Input power
Within 10 ms momentary
power failure

2) Momentary power failure exceeding 10 ms

y Restart processing like at power input shall


Input power be performed.
Momentary power failure exceeding 20ms
momentary power failure exceed

Remark

1) Momentary power failure?


This means the state that the voltage of supply power at power condition designated by PLC is
lowered as it exceeds the allowable variable range and the short time (some ms ~ some dozens ms)
interruption is called momentary power failure ).

5-2
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.1.3 Scan time


The processing time from program step 0 to the next step 0 is called Scan Time.

1) Scan time calculation expression


Scan time is the sum of the processing time of scan program and interrupt program prepared by the user
and PLC internal time, and is distinguished by the following formula.

(1) Scan time = Scan program processing time Interrupt program processing time PLC internal
processing time

y Scan program processing time = processing time of user program not saved as interrupt program
y Interrupt program processing time = Sum of interrupt program proceeding time processed during 1 scan
y PLC internal processing time = Self-diagnosis time I/O refresh time Internal data processing time
Communication service processing time

(2) Scan time depends on whether to execute interrupt program and communication processing.

2) Scan time monitor


(1) Scan time can be monitored Online-PLC Information-Performance.

(2) Scan time is save in special relay (F) area as follows.


y F0050: max. value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)
y F0051: min. value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)
y F0052: current value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)

5- 3
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.1.4 Scan Watchdog timer


WDT (Watchdog Timer) is the function to detect the program congestion by the error of hardware and software of
PLC CPU module.

1) WDT is the timer used to detect the operation delay by user program error. The detection time of WDT
is set in Basic parameter of XG5000.

2) If WDT detects the excess of detection setting time while watching the elapsed time of scan during
operation, it stops the operation of PLC immediately and keeps or clears the output according to
parameter setting

3) If the excess of Scan Watchdog Time is expected in the program processing of specific part while
performing the user program (FOR ~ NEXT instruction, CALL instruction), clear the timer by using WDT
instruction.
WDT instruction initializes the elapsed time of Scan Watchdog Timer and starts the time measurement
from 0 again.
(For further information of WDT instruction, please refer to Instruction.)

4) To clear the error state of watchdog, we can use the following method : power re-supply, manipulation
of manual reset switch, mode conversion to STOP mode.

WDT
count(ms)0 1 2 3 .. 8 9 0 1 2 012 6 7 0 1 2

WDT Reset SCAN END WDT instruction SCAN END


execution

Remark

1) The setting range of Watchdog Timer is 10 ~ 1000ms (Unit: 1ms).

5- 4
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.1.5 Timer processing

The XGB series use up count timer. There are 5 timer instructions such as on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOFF),
integral (TMR), monostable (TMON), and re-triggerable (TRTG) timer.
The measuring range of 100msec timer is 0.1 ~ 6553.5 seconds, 10msec timer is 0.01 ~ 655.35 seconds,
and that of 1msec timer is 0.001 ~ 65.53 seconds. Please refer to the XG5000 User manual for details.

Preset value
Timer output relay
Timer type
1) On delay timer
The current value of timer starts to increase from 0 when the input condition of TON instruction turns on.
When the current value reaches the preset value (Current value=Preset value), the timer output relay
(Txxxx) turns on. When the timer input condition is turned off, the current value becomes 0 and the timer
output relay is turned off.

Input condition

t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
Output relay

t0+PT t1 t4+PT t5
Preset value

Current value

t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

2) Off delay timer


The current value of timer set as preset value and the timer output relay is turned on when the input
condition of TOFF instruction turns on. When the input condition is turned off, the current value starts to
decrease. The timer output relay is turned off when the current value reaches 0.

Input condition

t0 t1 t2 t3 t5
Output relay

t0 t1+PT t2 t5+PT
Preset value

Current value
t0 t1 t2 t4 t5

5- 5
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

3) Integral timer
In general, its operation is same as on-delay timer. Only the difference is the current value will not be clear
when the input condition of TMR instruction is turned off. It keeps the elapsed value and restart to
increase when the input condition is turned on again. When the current value reaches preset value, the
timer output relay is turned on.
The current value can be cleared by the RST instruction only.

Timer input
condition
t0 t1 t2 t4 t5

Timer output relay

Preset value PT = (t1-t0)+(t3-t2)

Current value
t0 t1 t2 t3 t5 t5+PT

Timer reset input

4) Monostable timer
In general, its operation is same as off-delay timer. However, the change of input condition is ignored
while the timer is operating (decreasing). When current value reaches preset value the timer output relay
is turned off and current value is cleared.

Timer input
condition
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4

Timer output relay


t0 t0+PT t2 t2+PT t4 t4+PT
Preset value

Current value
t0 t1 t2 t4

5- 6
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5) Retriggerable timer
The operation of retriggerable timer is same as that of monostable timer. Only difference is that the
retriggerable timer is not ignore the input condition of TRTG instruction while the timer is operating
(decreasing). The current value of retriggerable timer will be set as preset value whenever the input
condition of TRTG instruction is turned on.

Timer input condition


t3

Timer output relay


t2
Preset value (PV)

Current value (ET)


t0 t0+PT t3

Remark
The Maximum timing error of timers of XGB series is 1 scan time + the time from 0 step to
timer instruction

5- 7
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.1.6 Counter processing

The counter counts the rising edges of pulses driving its input signal and counts once only when the input
signal is switched from off to on. XGB series have 4 counter instructions such as CTU, CTD, CTUD, and
CTR. The followings shows brief information for counter operation. Refer to the XGB Instruction Manual for
details.

Up counter increases the current value.


Down counter decreases the current value.
Up/Down counter compares the input value from both counters input.
Ring counter increase the current value and the current value is cleared as 0 when the current value
reaches the preset value.

1) Renewal of counters current value and contact On/Off


(1) Up counter

Up counter increases the current value at the rising edges of input.


The counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned On when the current value reaches the preset value.
When the reset input is turned On, the counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned Off.

(2) Down counter

Down counter decreases the current value at the rising edges of input.
The counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned On when the current value reaches the preset value.
When the reset input is turned On, the counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned Off.

(3) Up/Down counter

The current value is increased with the rising edge of up-count input signal, and decreased with the
rising edge of down-count input signal. The counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned On when the
current value is same as or more than current value. The counter output contact (Cxxx) is turned Off
when the current value is same as or less than current value.
When the reset input is turned On, the current value is cleared as 0.

5- 8
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

(4) Ring counter

The current value is increased with the rising edge of the counter input signal, and the counter output
contact (Cxxx) is turned on when the current value reaches the preset value. Then the current value and
counter output contact (Cxxx) is cleared as 0 when the next rising edge of the counter input signal is
applied.
When the reset input is turned On, the counter output contact is cleared as 0.

2) Maximum counting speed

The maximum counting speed of determined by the length of scan time. Counting is possible only when
the on/off switching time of the counter input signal is longer than scan time.

n 1 n : duty (%)
Maximum counting speed C max = ( )
100 tS t S : scan time [s]

Duty is the ratio of the input signals on time to off time as a percentage.

On

Off Off

T1 T2

T1
If T1 T2, n = x 100 [%]
T1+T2

If T1 > T2, n = x 100 [%]

Remark
1) Use of High Speed Counter
In order to counter pulse that is faster than maximum counting speed of normal counter, use
built-in High Speed counter function.

5- 9
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.2 Program Execution

5.2.1 Configuration of program


All functional elements need to execute a certain control process are called as a program. Program is stored in
the built-in RAM mounted on a CPU module or flash memory of a external memory module. The following table
shows the classification of the program.

Program type Description


It will be executed till the specific Flag INIT_DONE is On. And while the
initialization task is executed, several of initializing program is
Initializing program
programmed. (If INIT_DONE instruction is executed, scan program is
executed.)
Scan program The scan program is executed regularly in every scan.

The program is performed according to the fixed time interval in case that the
required processing time condition is as below.
 In case that the faster processing than 1 scan average processing time is
Cycle time interrupt
required
program
 In case that the longer time interval than 1 scan average processing time is
required
 In case that program is processed with the appointed time interval
External interrupt The external interrupt program is performed process on external interrupt
program signal.
Subroutine Only when some condition is satisfied.(in case that input condition of CALL
program instruction is On)

5.2.2 Program execution methods


Here describes the program proceeding method that is executed when the power is applied or key switch is RUN.
The program performs the operation processing according to the configuration as below.

Start processing

It executes up to execution of INIT_DONE instruction when initializing program is designated.


Initializing program

Subroutine program
External interrupt program
Only when some
Scan program
condition is satisfied.
Cycle time program

END processing

5- 10
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

1) Scan program

(1) Function
This program performs the operation repeatedly from 0 step to last step in order prepared by the program
to process the signal that is repeatedly regularly every scan.

In case that the execution condition of interrupt by task interrupt or interrupt module while executing
program is established, stop the current program in execution and perform the related interrupt program.
2) Interrupt program

(1) Function
This program stops the operation of scan program and then processes the related function in prior to
process the internal/external signal occurred periodically/non-periodically.

(2) Type
Task program is divided as below.
Cycle time task program: available to use up to 8.
Internal device task program: available to use up to 8.
I/O (External contact task program): available to use up to 8. (P000 ~ P007)

Cycle time task program


Performs the program according to the fixed time internal.

Internal device task program


Performs the corresponding program when the start condition of internal device occurs.
The start condition detection of device shall be performed after processing of scan program.

I/O (External contact task program)


Performs the program according to the input external signal (P000~P007).

Remark
(1) Write the interrupt program as shortly as possible. In case same interrupt occurs repeatedly
before completion of interrupt, program is not executed and O/S watch dog error may occur.
(2) Though interrupt which has lower priority occurs many times during execution of interrupt
which has higher priority, interrupt which has lower priority occurs only one time.

5- 11
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.2.3 Interrupt
For your understanding of Interrupt function, here describes program setting method of XG5000 which is an XGB
programming S/W. Example of interrupt setting is as shown bellows.

Interrupt setting
Interrupt source Interrupt name priority Task No. Program
Initializing Interrupt 0_ - - -
Cycle time 1 Interrupt 1_cycle time 2 0 Cycle time 1
External Interrupt 2_external 2 8 External
Internal device Interrupt 3_internal 3 14 Internal
Cycle time 2 Interrupt 4_cycle time 3 1 Cycle time 2

Scan program

Initializing
(Before INIT_DONE instruction)

Interrupt 1_Cycle time


Cycle time 1 execution
occur

Cycle time 1/
Cycle time 1 execution
external occur
simultaneously
External I/O execution

Internal device
Interrupt occur

Cycle time 2
Cycle time 2 execution
occur

Internal device interrupt


END execution

Cycle time 1 Timed-driven 1


execution execution

Remark
In case that several tasks to be executed are waiting, execute from the highest Task Program in
priority. When the same priority tasks are waiting, execute from the order occurred.
While interrupt executing, if the highest interrupt is occurred, the highest interrupt is executed earliest of
all.
When power On, All interrupts are in the state Disable
Internal device interrupt is executed after END instruction.

5- 12
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

1) How to prepare interrupt program

Generate the task in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the program to be performed by each
task. For further information, please refer to XG5000 users manual.
(It can be additional when XG5000 is not connected with PLC.)

Click right button of mouse on project name and click Add item-Task.

The screen of Task setting is shown. Click Initialization in Execution condition and make a Task name.

5- 13
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Click right button of mouse at registered task and selectAdd Item-Program.

Make initializing program. In initializing program, INIT_DONE instruction must be made. If not, Scan
program is not executed.

5- 14
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

2) How to prepare Cycle interrupt program

Generate the task in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the program to be performed by each
task. For further information, please refer to XG5000 users manual.
(It can be additional when XG5000 is not connected with PLC)

Click right button of mouse at registered task and selectAdd Item-Program.

It shows setting screen of Task.

5- 15
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Task type
Classification Description Remark
Character, number
Task name Make Task name.
available
2 is the highest
Priority Set the priority of task. (2~7)
priority number.
Set the Task number.
Cycle time task (0 ~ 7): 8
Task number -
External I/O task (8 ~ 15): 8
Internal device task (16 ~ 23): 8
Till the execution of
Initialization Set the initial program when running the project. INIT_DONE
instruction
0~4294967295
Cycle time Set the cyclic interrupt.
Execution available
condition P000 ~ P007
I/O Set the external I/O.
available
Set the internal device to interrupt execution.
Internal
Bit: Among Rising, Falling, Transition, On, Off -
device
Word: Among >,>=,<,<=

Click right button of mouse at registered task and selectAdd Item-Program.

5- 16
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Register the Program name and Program description.

It is displayed the program window to write task program.

It is displayed the setting in project window.

5- 17
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

3) Task type

Task type and function is as follows.


Type Cycle time task I/O task Internal device task
Spec. (Interval task) (Interrupt task) (Single task)
Max. Task
8 8 8
number
Cyclic
Rising or falling edge of
(setting up to max. Internal device
Start condition main units contact P000
4,294,967.295 sec. by execution condition
~P007
1ms unit)
Retrieve the condition
Immediate execution at
Detection and Cyclic execution per and execute after
the edge of main units
execution setting time completing Scan
contact
Program
Detection delay Delay as much as max.
Max. 1 ms delay Max. 0.05 ms delay
time scan time
2~7 level setting 2~7 level setting 2~7 level setting
Execution
(2 level is highest in (2 level is highest in (2 level is highest in
priority
priority) priority) priority)
Within 0~7 range
With 8~15 range without Within 16~23 range
Task no. without user
user duplication without user duplication
duplication

4) Processing methods of task program

Here describes common processing method and notices for Task program.

(1) Feature of task program


y Task Program is executed only when execution condition occurs without every scan repeat processing.
When preparing Task Program, please consider this point.
y For example, if a timer and counter were used in cyclic task program of 10 second cycle, this timer
occurs the tolerance of max. 10 seconds and the counter and the timer and as the counter checks the
input status of counter per 10 seconds, the input changed within 10 seconds is not counted up.

(2) Execution priority


y In case that several tasks to be executed are waiting, execute from the highest Task Program in priority.
When the same priority tasks are waiting, execute from the order occurred.
y In case Cycle time task and external I/O task is occurred concurrently, execute from the highest task
program. (In sequence of XG5000 setting)
y The task program priority should be set considering the program features, importance and the
emergency when the execution requested.

(3) Processing delay time


There are some causes for Task Program processing delay as below. Please consider this when task
setting or program preparation.
y Task detection delay (Refer to detailed description of each task.)
y Program proceeding delay caused by Priority Task Program proceeding

(4) Relationship of initialize, Scan Program and Task Program


y ser identification task does not start while performing Initialization Task Program.
y As Scan Program is set as lowest priority, if task occurs, stop Scan Program and process Task Program
in advance. Accordingly, if task occurs frequently during 1 scan or concentrates intermittently, scan time
may extend abnormally. Cares should be taken in case of task condition setting.

5- 18
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

(5) Protection of Program in execution from Task Program


y In case that the continuity of program execution is interrupted by high priority Task Program during
program execution, it is available to prohibit the execution of Task Program partially for the part in
problem. In this case, it is available to perform the program protection by DI (Task Program Start
Disabled) and EI (Task Program Start Enabled) application instruction.
y Insert DI application instruction in the start position of the part requiring the protection and insert EI
application instruction in the position to release. Initialization Task is not influenced by DI, EI application
instruction.
y If interrupt is occurred while CALLP instruction executing, interrupt program is executed after CALLP
instruction execution.

5) Cyclic task program processing method


Here describes the processing method in case that task (start condition) of Task program is set as Cycle
time.

(1) Items to be set in Task


y Set the execution cycle and priority which are the start condition o f Task program to execution. Check
the task no. to manage the task.
(2) Cyclic task processing
y Performance the corresponding cyclic task program per setting time interval (execution cycle).
(3) Notice in using cyclic task program
y When cyclic task program is in execution currently or waiting for execution, if the demand to execute the
same task program occurs, the new occurred task shall be disregarded.
y Timer that makes a demand to execute cyclic task program only while operation mode is Run mode,
shall be added. The shutdown time shall be all disregarded.
y When setting the execution cycle of cyclic task program, consider the possibility that the demand to
execute several cyclic task program at the same time occurs.
If 4 cyclic task programs that the cycle is 2sec, 4sec, 10sec and 20sec are used, 4 demands of
execution per 20 seconds shall be occurred at the same time and scan time may extend
instantaneously.

5- 19
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

6) I/O task program processing

It described the I/O task program processing. (P000 ~ P007)

(1) Items to be set in Task


y Set the execution condition and priority to the task being executed. Check the task no. to manage the
task.
(2) I/O task processing
y If interrupt signal from external signal (I/O) is occurred on main unit (P000 ~ P007), task program is
executed by external (I/O) signal.
(3) Precaution in using I/O task program
y If task program which is executed by interrupt signal is on execution or standby status, new task program
which is requested by identical I/O is ignored.
y Only operation mode is Run mode, execution request of task program is recognized. Namely, execution
request of task program is ignored when operation mode is Stop mode.

5- 20
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

7) Internal device task program processing


Here describes the processing method of international device task program which extended the task (start
condition) of task program from contact point to device as execution range.

(1) Items to be set in Task


y Set the execution condition and priority to the task being executed. Check the task no. for task
management.

(2) Internal device task processing


y After completing the scan program execution in CPU module, if the condition that becomes the start
condition of internal device task program is met, according to the priority, it shall be executed.

(3) Precautions in using internal device task program


y Accordingly, even if the execution condition of internal device task program occurs in Scan Program
or Task Program (Cycle time, I/O), it shall not be executed immediately but executed at the time of
completion of Scan Program.
y If the demand to execute Internal Device Task Program occurs, the execution condition shall be
examined at the time of completion of Scan Program. Accordingly, if the execution condition of Internal
Device Task occurs by Scan Program or Task Program (Cycle time) during 1 scan and disappears, the
task shall not be executed as it is not possible to detect the execution at the time of examination of
execution condition.

5- 21
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

8) Verification of task program

(1) Is the task setting proper?


If task occurs frequently more than needed or several tasks occur in one scan at the same time, scan time
may lengthen or be irregular. In case not possible to change the task setting, verify max. scan time.

(2) Is the priority of task arranged well?


The low priority task program shall be delayed by the high priority task program, which results in disabling
the processing within the correct time and even task collision may occur as next task occurs in the state
that the execution of previous task is delayed. Consider the emergency of task and execution time etc
when setting the priority.

(3) Is the Task Program written in shortest?


If the execution time of Task Program is longer, scan time may lengthen or be irregular. Even it may cause
the collision of task program. Write the execution time as short as possible. (Especially, when writing the
cyclic task program, write the execution time so that the task program can be executed within 10% cycle
of the shortest task among several tasks.)

(4) Is program protection for the high priority task needed during program execution?
If other task is inserted during task program execution, complete the task in execution and operate the
standby tasks in the order of high priority. In case that it is not allowed to insert other task in Scan
Program, prevent the insert partially by using DI and EI application instruction. The problem may occur
while processing the global variables used commonly with other program or special or communication
module.

9) Program configuration and processing example

If task and program are registered as below.


Interrupt type Interrupt name Priority Task No. Program
Cycle time 10 _cycle time 3 0 Program 1
Internal device Internal device_M00 5 16 Program 2
I/O I/O_P00 2 8 Program 3
Scan program name: Scan Program
Execution time respective program: Scan program = 17 , Program 1 = 2 , Program 2= 7 ,
Program 3 = 2

5- 22
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Scan started
(Initial operation started) Scan program stopped New scan started

PO executed

P1 executed

10ms_Cycle time

Program 2

Internal device_M000

Program 3

External I/O_P000
Time
0 6 7 8 10 12 20 22 24 25 30 32 34

Process per time

Time () Process

0 Scan started and scan program started to execute.


0~6 Scan program is executed.
Scan program is stop because execution external I/O (P000) is requested. And program
6~8 3 is executed. Request of execution at 7[ms] is ignored because program 3 has been
executing.
8~10 Program 3 is finished and Scan program is continued.
Scan program is stop by request of 10 _Cycle time interrupt signal and execute program
10~12
1.
12~20 Program 1 is finished and Scan program is continued.
Request of Cycle time interrupt signal and External I/O (P000) signal is occurred
20 concurrently but priority of External I/O signal is higher than Cycle time interrupt signal
so program 3 is executed and program 1 is standby.
20~22 Program 3 is finished and Scan program is continued.
22~24 After program 3 is completed, program 1 (the program of 10ms_Cycle time is executed.
24~25 P1 execution completed and the stopped scan program execution finished
At the finished point of scan program, check the request of Internal device M000
25
execution and execute program 2.
25~30 Program P2 is executed.
When 10 _Cycle time interrupt signal is occurred, the priority of that is higher than Internal
30~32
device M000 though program 2 is stopped and program 1 is executed.
32~34 P1 executed completed and the stopped P2 execution finished
34 New scan starts (Start scan program execution)

5- 23
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.3 Operation Mode

For operation mode of CPU module, there are 3 types such as RUN mode, STOP mode and DEBUG mode..
Here describes the operation processing of each operation mode.

5.3.1 RUN mode


This is the mode to executed program operation normally.

RUN mode first scan start

Initialize data area

Examine Program effectiveness and judge the


possibility of execution

Execute input refresh

Program execute, Interrupt Program execute

Examine the normal operation or missing of


built-in module

Execute output refresh

Communication service and internal processing

RUN mode keep


Operation
mode change
Change to other mode
Operation by changed operation
mode

1) Processing at mode change


At the beginning, execute initialization of data area and examine the effectiveness of program and judge the
possibility of execution.

2) Operation processing contents


Execute I/O refresh and program operation.
(1) Detects the start condition of Interrupt Program and executes Interrupt Program.
(2) Examines the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(3) Communication service and other internal processing.

5- 24
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.3.2 STOP mode


This is the mode in stop state without Program operation. It is available to transmit the program through XG5000
only in Remote STOP mode.

1) Processing at Mode Change


Clear the output image area and execute output refresh.

2) Operation Processing Contents


(1) Executes I/O refresh.
(2) Examines the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(3) Communication service or other internal processing.

5.3.3 DEBUG mode


This is the mode to detect Program error or trace the operation process and the conversion to this mode is
available only in STOP mode. This is the mode to check the program execution state and the contents of each
data and verify the program.

1) Processing at mode change


(1) Initializes the data area at the beginning of mode change.
(2) Clears the output image area and execute input refresh.

2) Operation processing contents


(1) Executes I/O refresh.
(2) Debug operation according to setting state.
(3) After finishing Debug operation by the end of Program, execute output refresh.
(4) Examine the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(5) Executes communication service or other service.

3) Debug operation
It describes debug mode.

5- 25
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Item Description Remark


Start/Stop Debugging Change the debug stop mode
Go It starts debug operation.
Step Over It operates by 1 step.
Step Into It starts the subroutine program. Other operation is
identical to Step
Step Out It finished the subroutine program. Over.
Go to Cursor It operates to current cursor position.
Set/Removes current cursor position to break
Set/Remove Breakpoints
points.
Breakpoints List It displays list of breakpoints.
Breakpoint Conditions It specifies device value and number of scan.

(1) Set/Remove Breakpoints


Sets breakpoint at current cursor position. After breakpoint setting, (breakpoint setting indicator) is
displayed.

(2) Go
Run the program to breakpoint. At break-pointer (stop indicator) is displayed.

5- 26
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

(3) Step Over


Run the program to next step. At break point, Step over indicator is displayed.

(4) Breakpoint List


It displays current Breakpoint List. It supports Select All, Reset All, Goto, Remove, Remove All.

(5) Break condition


It sets Device Break and Scan Break.

5- 27
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Remark

Refer to XG5000 Users Manual Chapter 12 Debugging for detailed information.

5- 28
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.3.4 Change operation mode


1) Operation Mode Change Method

The method to change operation mode are as follows.

(1) By mode key of CPU module


(2) By connecting the programming tool (XG5000) to communication port of CPU
(3) By changing the operation mode of other CPU module connected to network by XG5000 connected to
communication port of CPU.
(4) By using XG5000, HMI, computer link module connected to network
(5) By STOP instruction during program execution

2) Type of operation mode

The operation mode setting is as follows.

Operation mode switch XG5000 command Operation mode

RUN X Run
RUN Remote Run
STOP Remote Stop
STOP
Debug Debug Run
Mode change Previous operation mode
RUN -> STOP - Stop

(1) Remote mode conversion is available only in the state of Remote Enabled: On, Mode switch: Stop.
(2) In case of changing the Remote RUN mode to STOP by switch, operate the switch as follows.
(STOP) RUN STOP .

Warning
In case of changing Remote RUN mode to RUN mode by switch, PLC operation continues the
operation without interruption.

It is available to modify during RUN in RUN mode by switch but the mode change operation by
XG5000 is limited. This should be set only in case that remote mode change is not allowed.

5- 29
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.4 Memory
There are two types of memory in CPU module that the user can use. One is Program Memory that saves the
user program written by the user to build the system, and the other is Data Memory that provides the device area
to save the data during operation.

5.4.1 Data memory

1) Bit device area

Various Bit Device are provided per function. The indication method is indicated by device type for first digit,
word position by decimal for middle digit and bit position by hexadecimal for the last digit.

Area per device


Device features Description
S type H type
Image area to save the state of I/O device.
P0000 ~ P0000~ After reading the input module state, saves it in the
I/O device P
P127f P1023f corresponding P area and sends P area Data
saving the operation result to output module.

M0000 ~ M0000~ Internal Memory provided to save Bit Data in


Internal device M
M255f M1023f Program

L0000 ~ L0000~ Communication device Device to indicate high speed link/P2P service state
L1279f L2047f L information of communication module.

Device area to preserve the data during power


K00000 K00000~ shutdown, which is used without setting power
Preservation device K
~ K2559f K4095f shutdown preservation parameter separately. (Pay
attention to write in special area (K2600 ~ 2559F)).

F0000 ~ F0000~ System flag area that manages the flag necessary
Special device F
F255f F1023f for system operation in PLC.

T0000 ~ T0000~ Area to save the state of contact/current value/set


Timer device T
T255 T1023 value of timer device

C0000 ~ C0000~ Area to save the state of contact/current value/set


Counter device C
C255 C1023 value of counter device

S00.00 ~ S00.00~ Step controller S


Relay for step control
S127.99 S127.99 128 x 100 step

5- 30
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

2) Word device area

Area per device


Device features Description
S type H type

D00000 ~ D0000~ Data register D Area to preserve the internal data.


D5119 D10239 Bit expression possible. (D0000.0)

U00.00 ~ U00.00~ Analog data Register used to read data from special module installed
U07.31 U0A.31 register U in the slot. Bit expression possible

Communication
N0000 ~ N0000~ P2P Service Save area of communication module.
data register
N3935 N5119 Bit expression impossible
N

Z000 ~ Z000~ Index register Dedicated device to use Index function


Z127 Z127 Z Bit expression impossible

T0000 ~ T0000~ Timer current value


Area to indicate the current value of timer
T255 T1023 register T

C0000 ~ C0000~ Counter current


Area to indicate the current value of counter
C255 C1023 value register C

R0000~
- File register R Register for saving the file
R10239

5- 31
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.5 Configuration Diagram of Data Memory

5.5.1 S type
Bit data area Word data area
0 ~ F 0000 ~ FFFF
P000 D0000
I/O Relay Data Register Parameter area
(2048 points) (5120 words)
P127 P
M000 D5119 D User Program area
Auxiliary Relay
N0000 (10 K step)
(4096 points)
Comm. Data
M255 M
Register
K000
Keep Relay (3936 words)

(40960 points) N3935 N


K2559 K
F000
U00.00
Special Relay Analog Data
(4096 points) Register
F255 F
U07.31 (256 words) U
L0000
Auxiliary Relay Z000 Index Register
(20480 points) L Z127 (128 words)
L1279 Z

T000 T000 Timer setting value


Timer
T255 (256 words)
(256 points) T000 Timer current value
T255 T
C000 T255 (256 words)
Counter C000
Counter setting value
C255 (256 points) C
C255 (256 words)
C000
Counter current value
S000
Step controller C255 (256 words)
(128 x 100 step)
S127 S00.00~S127.99 S

5- 32
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.5.2 H type

Bit data area Word data area User Program area

0 ~ F 0000 ~ FFFF
P0000 D0000
I/O Relay Data Register Parameter area
(2048 points) (10240 words)
P1023 P
M0000 D10239 D User Program area
Auxiliary Relay
N0000 (15 K step)
(4096 points)
Comm. Data
M1023 M
Register
K0000
Keep Relay (5120 words)

(40960 points) N5119 N


K4095 K
F0000
U00.00
Special Relay Analog Data
(4096 points) Register
F1023 F
U0A.31 (1024 words) U
L0000
Auxiliary Relay Z000 Index Register
(20480 points) L Z127 (128 words)
L2047 Z

T0000 R000 File Register


Timer
R10239 (10240 words)
(256 points) R
T1023 T
C0000
Counter T0000 Timer setting value
C1023 (256 points) C (1024 words)
T1023
T0000 Timer current value
S000 T1023 (1024 words)
Step controller
(128 x 100 step) C0000
Counter setting value
S127 S00.00~S127.99 S
C1023 (1024 words)
C0000
Counter current value
C1023 (1024 words)

5- 33
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

5.5.3 Data latch area setting


When PLC stops and restarts the data required for operation or the data occurred during operation, if you
want to keep and use those data, data latch can be used and it is available to use a certain area of some
data device as latch area by parameter setting.

The below shows the features for latch device.


Device 1st latch 2nd latch Features
P X X Image area to save the state of I/O device

M O O Internal device area

K X X Device keeping the device state during power shutdown

F X X System flag area

T O O Timer related area (Bit/words both)

C O O Counter related area (Bit/words both)

S O O Relay for step control

D O O General words data save area

U X X Analog Data Register (latch disabled )


High speed link/P2P Service state device of communication
L X X
module (latch enabled)
P2P Service address area of communication module (latch
N X X
enabled)
Z X X Index dedicated Register (latch disabled)

R X X File register (latch enabled)

Remark

K, L, N, R devices are basically latched.

1) Latch area setting


Click Device Area Setup of Basic parameter settings.

5- 34
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

2) Data latch area operation


The method to delete the latched data is as below.
- latch 1, latch 2 clear operation by XG5000
- write by Program (initialization program recommended)
- write 0 FILL from XG5000 monitor mode.

For keep or reset (clear) operation of latch area data according to PLC operation, please refer to the
below table.
No. Classification Detailed operation Latch 1 Latch 2
1 Power change Off/On Keep Keep
2 Reset by XG5000 Overall reset Reset Keep
3 Program write (online) - Keep Keep
SRAM broken by battery error Reset Reset
4 Data broken
Data broken by other reason Reset Reset
Clear Latch 1 Reset Keep
5 XG5000 online
Clear Latch 2 Reset Reset

Latch 1 area is cleared byOnline-Reset PLC- Overall reset.

5- 35
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method

Latch 1, 2 area is cleared byOnline-Clear PLC.

3) Data initialization

In case of Memory Delete state, the memory of all device shall be cleared as 0. In case of giving the data
value at the beginning according to system, please use the initialization task.

Device area is cleared by click Clear in Online-Clear PLC-Clear Memory.

5- 36
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

Chapter 6 CPU Functions


6.1 Type Setting
It describes setting of XGB PLC type.

PLC
CPU type Description Reference
Series
XGB-DR16C3 Dedicated product Module type
XGB XGB-XBMS S type : XBM-DN16/32S , XBM-DR16S Module type
Compact
XGB-XBCH H type : XBC-DR32/64H , XBC-DN32/64H
type

Remark

In case type is different, connection is not available.

6- 1
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.2 Parameter Setting

This paragraph describes how to set parameters.

6.2.1 Basic parameter setting


Clicking Basic Parameter in the project window shows the following window.

There are three main options ; Basic Operation Setup , Device Area Setup and Error Operation
Setup.

6- 2
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

Category Item Description Note


Fixed period
Set the time of fixed period operation. 1~999
operation
Watchdog timer Set the time of scan watchdog. 10~1000
Standard input filter Set the time of standard input filter. 1,3,5,10,20,70,100
Basic Output during Set whether to allow output actually during
operations Allowance/Prohibition
debugging debugging operation.
Keep output when Set whether to preserve output holding
Allowance/Prohibition
an error occurs function set in I/O parameter in case of error.
Delete all areas
Set whether to clear each device that is not
except latch when an Allowance/Prohibition
designated as a latch area in case of error
error occurs
Device
Select latch area Set the latch area of each device. -
area
Operation resumes
Error Set whether to pause or resume operation in
in case of operation Pause/Resume
operation case of operation error.
error

6.2.2 I/O parameter setting

This setting is to set and reserve each I/O information. Clicking I/O Parameter in the project
window shows the following setting window.

Clicking Module in Slot Position indicates a list of modules, in which you may set I/O
corresponding to the actual system. Then, the following window is displayed.

6- 3
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

Clicking Details in Slot Position shows the following window to set filter and emergency output.

Remark

If settings are different with I/O module actually accessed, Inconsistent module type error occurs,
displaying error.
Without settings, CPU reads each I/O module information and operates.

6.3 Self-diagnosis Function

6.3.1 Saving of error log


CPU module logs errors occurred so that the causes will be identified and fixed easily. Clicking
Error/Warning of Online shows the current error and previous error log.

[S type] [H type]

Item Description Remarks


Error/Warning Display the current error/warning. -
Error Log Display a log of error/warning occurred. Saving up to 100

Remark

1) Saved data are not deleted until selecting a menu of XG5000 and clicking Delete.
2) H type displays Data and Time.

6- 4
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.3.2 Troubleshooting

1) Trouble types
Trouble occurs due to PLC itself, system configuration error or abnormal operation result detected. Trouble
is divided into trouble mode stopping operation for the safety and warning mode generating alert to user
with a mode in trouble.

The causes troubling PLC system are as follows.

y PLC hardware trouble


y System configuration error
y Operation error while operating user program
y Error detected owing to external device in trouble

2) Operation mode if trouble occurs


PLC system logs any trouble occurred in flag and determines whether to stop or resume operation
depending on trouble mode.

A) PLC hardware trouble


In case an error occurs so that PLC such as CPU module and power module may not work normally,
the system is halted, but any warning may not interfere with the operation.

B) Operation error while operating user program


Representing an error occurred during operation of user program, in case of numeric operation error,
it displays the error in error flag but the system resumes operating. However, if the operation time
exceeds by the operation monitoring time limit and I/O module does not control it normally, the system
is halted.

C) Error detected owing to external device in trouble


Representing the detection of external device to be controlled by users program of PLC, if an error is
detected, the system is halted, but any warning may not interfere with the operation.

Remark

1) If any trouble occurs, the unique trouble number is saved in a special relay F****.
2) For details of flag, refer to the appendix 1 Flag List.

6- 5
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.4 Remote Functions


CPU module may change operation by communication as well as by key switches mounted on the module. To
operate it remotely, it is necessary to set RUN/STOP switch to STOP.

1) Remote operations are as follows.


Operable by accessing to XG5000 through RS-232C port mounted on CPU module.
Can operate other PLC connected to PLC network with CPU module connected to XG5000.

2) Remote RUN/STOP
Remote RUN/STOP is the externally controlled RUN/STOP function.
It is convenient when CPU module is located at a position hard to control or when CPU module within
control panel is to control RUN/STOP function remotely.
3) Remote DEBUG
It manages debugging remotely when remote mode is STOP. Namely, DEBUG operation is to execute
program operation depending on designated operation conditions.
Remote DEBUG is a convenient function when confirming program operation status or data during
system debugging.
4) Remote Reset
Remote reset is to reset CPU module remotely if an error occurs at a place hard to directly control CPU
module.
Like operation by switches, it supports Reset and Overall Reset.

Remark

1) For details regarding remote functions, refer to Online of XG5000 Users Manual.

6- 6
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.5 Forced Input/Output On and Off Function


Force I/O function is used to force to turn I/O areas on or off, regardless of program results.

6.5.1 Force I/O setup

Click Online - Force I/O .

Item Description
Move to the beginning and end of I/O area (P000P127)
Move address Move to 8 of I/O area displayed at the very left.
Move to 1 of I/O area.
Application Set whether to allow or not Force I/O
Flag Set whether to allow or not Force I/O by bits.
Single
Data Set Force I/O data on or off by bits.
Select All Set to allow Force I/O with all I/O area on

Delete to allow Force I/O with all I/O area off.


Delete All
Setting device Display I/O area set as a bit.

6- 7
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.5.2 Processing time and processing method of Force Input/Output On and Off
1) Forced Input
Regarding input, at the time of input refresh it replaces the data of contact set as Force On/Off among
data read from input module with the data as Force and updates input image area. Therefore, user
program executes operations with actual input data while Force input area is operated with data set as
Force.

2) Forced Output
Regarding output, at the time of output refresh upon the execution user program operation, it replaces
the data of contact set as Force On/Off among data of output image area containing operation results
with data set as Force and outputs the data in output module. Unlike (Force) input, the output image
area is not changed by Force On/Off setting.

3) Cautions when using Force I/O function


y It operates from the time when I/O is individually set as Allow after setting Force data.
y It is possible to set Force input although I/O module is not actually mounted.
y Despite of the power changed Off -> On, operation mode changes or any operation by pressing reset key,
the data of which On/Off is set before is kept in CPU module.
y Even in STOP mode, Force I/O data is not removed.
y To set new data from the beginning, it is necessary to deselect all settings of I/O by using Delete All
option.

6.6 Direct Input/Output Operation


Refreshing I/O operates after completion of scan program. If data of I/O is changed while program is
scanned, it does not refreshed at the changed moment. Refreshed I/O data is applied after END instruction
on program.

This function may be useful when directly reading the status of input contact during program operation by
refreshing I/O by means of IORF instruction or outputting operation results to output contact.

IORF command is operated when M00000 is ON. First operand designates slot number. Second operand
designates the upper 32 bit data as mask data. Third operand designates the lower 32 bit data as mask data.
The bit to refresh set as 1 (hFF) and others set as 0 (h00) (not refreshed).

Remark

For details regarding IORF instruction, refer to XGB Instructions List.

6- 8
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.7 Diagnosis of External Device

This flag is provided for a user to diagnose any fault of external device and, in turn, execute halt or warning of
the system. Use of this flag displays faults of external device without any complicated program prepared and
monitors fault location without any specific device (XG5000 and etc) or source program.

1) Detection and classification of faults in external device


The trouble (fault) of external device may be detected by user program and largely divided, depending on
the type, into error and warning; the former requires halt of PLC operation and the latter simply displays
the status while PLC keeps working.
Error uses F202 (_ANC_ERR) and Warning uses F203 (_ANC_WB) flag.
As the detection request flag, Error uses F2002 (_CHK_ANC_ERR) flag while Warning uses F2003
(_CHK_ANC_WB) flag.

2) Troubleshooting external device


When detecting any trouble of external device in user program, it writes a value except 0 by classifying
the type, which is defined by a user in F202 (_ANC_ERR) while the detection request flag checks it at
the time when the program ends with F2002 (_CHK_ANC_ERR) On, and PLC turns off all output,
making it as the same error status as detected by PLC itself.
If any trouble occurs, a user may identify the cause by using XG5000 and alternatively by monitoring
F202 (_ANC_ERR) flag.

Example

M000
Error device bit On
FSET F2020

FSET F2002 Error detection request On

If any trouble occurs, CPU is in error status and operation halts. At this moment, F2020 and F2002 flags
are off (error LED switches on and off every second.)

3) Processing warning of external device


When detecting any warning of external device in user program, it turns on a flag in the warning position
of system flag F203 (_ANC_WB) and if turning on the detection request flag, F2003 (_CHK_ANC_WB) ,
it displays warning at the time when scan program ends. If a warning occurs, the detection request flag,
F2003 (_CHK_ANC_WB) is automatically off (F203 is not deleted).
If a warning occurs, the LED switches on and off every other second.
If turning off a bit in question of F203 and turning on F2003 bit after processing warning, warning is
cancelled and the LED turns off.

Example

M000
FSET F2030 Warning device bit On

FSET F2003 Warning detection request On


M001
FRST F2030 Warning cancellation

FSET F2003 Warning detection request On

6- 9
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.8 Allocation of Input/Output Number


Allocation of I/O number is to allocate an address to every I/O of each module to read data from input module
and output data to output module when it executes operations.
XGB series adopts 64 points occupation to every module.

1) Allocation of I/O number


64 points are allocated to every module (incl. special, communication).

System Configuration

Number of
Type I/O allocation Remarks
Connection stage
Input: P0000 ~ P001F
0 XBM-DN32S Basic unit fixed
Output: P0020 ~ P003F
1 XBE-DC32A Input: P0040~P007F Actual input: P0040 ~ P004F

2 XBE-TN32A Output: P0080 ~ P011F Actual output: P0080 ~ P009F

3 XBL-C41A P0120 ~ P015F -

4 XBF-AD04A P0160 ~ P019F -

5 XBE-DV04A P0200~P027F -

6 XBE-DC32A Input: P0240~P027F Actual input: P0240 ~ P024F

7 XBE-TN32A Output: P0280 ~ P031F Actual output: P0280 ~ P028F

Empty I/O point is available for internal relay.

2) In case of allocating IO of IO parameter, allocation information is displayed.

6- 10
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

System Configuration

Number of
Connection Type I/O allocation Remarks
stage
Input: P0000 ~ P001F
0 XBC-DN32H Basic unit fixed
Output: P0020 ~ P003F
1 XBE-DC32A Input: P0040~P007F Actual input: P0040 ~ P005F

2 XBE-TN32A Output: P0080 ~ P011F Actual output: P0080 ~ P009F

3 XBL-C41A P0120 ~ P015F -

4 XBF-AD04A P0160 ~ P019F -

5 XBF-DV04A P0200 ~ P023F -

6 XBE-DC32A Input: P0240~P027F Actual input: P0240 ~ P025F

7 XBE-TN32A Output: P0280 ~ P031F Actual output: P0280 ~ P029F

In case of using monitor function of XG5000, I/O allocation information is displayed.

I/O module allocation


information

Description of each module

6- 11
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.9 Online Editing


It is possible to modify program and communication parameter during operation of PLC without control
operation stopped. The following describes basic modification. For details of modifying program, refer to
XG5000 Users Manual.

Items to be modified during operation are as follows.


Program
Communication parameter

1) It displays programs that are currently running.

2) Click Online-Start Online Editing.

6- 12
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

3) It turns to program modification mode during run when the program background is changed.

4) Modifying a program.

5) Upon the modification of program, click Online-Write Modified Program.

6- 13
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6) Upon the writing of program, click Online-End Online Editing.

7) The program background returns and the program modification during run is completed.

Remark

For parameter modification during run, change each parameter on XG-PD and clickOnline-Write
Modified Program .

6- 14
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.10 Reading Input/Output Information


It monitors information of individual modules consisted of XGB series system.

1) ClickOnline-I/O Info. Then, information of each module connected to the system is monitored.

2) If clicking Details after selecting a module, it displays detail information of a selected module.

6- 15
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.11 Monitoring
It monitors system information of XGB series system.

(1) ClickingMonitor displays the following sub-menus.

(2) Items and descriptions

Item Description Remarks

Start/Stop Monitoring Designate the start and stop of monitor. Click for reverse turn.

Pause Pause monitoring. -

Resume Resume paused monitor. -


Pause monitoring if a preset value of device Monitor resumes;
Pausing Conditions
corresponds to condition. clicking for resume.
Change the present value of currently selected
Change Current Value -
device.
System Monitoring Monitor general system information. -

Device Monitoring Monitor by device (type). -

Trend Monitoring Monitor trend of device set in the system.


Monitor the value of device set when an event set
Custom Events For details, refer to
by a user occurs.
XG5000 Users Manual.
Data Traces Trace the value of device.

6- 16
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

(a) Change current value


It changes the current value of each device selected in the current program window.

(b) Device monitoring


It monitors by device (type).

6- 17
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

(c) Pausing conditions


It stops monitoring in case a device value set in the program corresponds.

(d) Trend monitoring

It displays device values graphically.

6- 18
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

(e) Custom events

It monitors detail information when an event set by a user occurs. Additional user event may be
registered.

It sets basic setting and relative device.


If rising edge of M0000 device occurs, it records the message of an alarm, Out of order Water Tank 1
and the device values of D0000,L0000,D0100,N1000 are recorded.

Set the relative device(s).

6- 19
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

Monitor event history of custom event.

Double-clicking a number produced monitors the relative values of device and the detail message as
follows.

Remark

For details of monitor, refer to XG5000 Users Manual.

6- 20
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.12 RTC function


H type (XBC-DxxxH) supports the RTC (clock) function and user can use this function for time
management of system or error log. RTC function is executed steadily when power is off or instantaneous
power cut status. Current time of RTC is renewed every scan by system operation status information flag.

6.12.1 How to use

(1) Reading/setting clock data


(a) Reading or setting from XG5000
1) ClickOnlinePLC Information.
2) Click PLC RTC tap of PLC Information.

3) In case the user wants to send the clock of PC to PLC, press Synchronize PLC with PC clock.
4) In case the user wants to send the clock the user wants, change the setting value of Time box
and press Send to PLC.

(b) Reading by special relay


The user can monitor as follows by special relay.
Special relay area Data Contents
F053 H0709 07year 9month
F054 H1214 12date 14hour
F055 H2040 20minute 40second
F056 H2003 20XXyear, Wednesday

6- 21
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

(c) Modification of clock data by program

07year 9month

12date 14hour

20minute 40second

20XXyear, Wednesday

area Content
K0000 Year, month
K0001 Date, hour
K0002 Minute, second
K0003 Centaury, day

Write clock data to temporary device (P, M, K, L, Z, U, D, R) and turn on/off input contact point
M0000. ( If date and day data is not matched, Write is not available.)
Monitor and check the above special area (F053~F056)

(d) How to express the day


Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Day Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

(2) Deviation of clock data


2.2s / 1 d

Remark
1) Initially, RTC may not have any clock data.
2) When using the CPU module, first make sure to set the accurate clock data.
3) If any data out of the clock data range is written into RTC, it does not work properly.
i.e.) 14M 32D 25H
4) RTC may stop or have an error due to abnormal battery and other causes. The error is released if a
new clock data is written.

6- 22
Chapter 6 CPU Functions

6.13 External Memory Module

You can save the user program safely and download the program into the system when program is damaged
without special manipulation by using external memory module.

6.13.1 Structure

RUN LED
WRITE LED
READ LED

No. 0 : READ mode


RS-232C connector No. 1 : WRITE mode

6.13.2 How to use


Through the following procedure, you can download the program saved in the memory module into PLC.
(1) Saving the user program in the external memory module
(a) Set the switch of memory module into 0.
(b) Install the memory module at RS-232C port of main unit
- After installation, program and parameter is saved in the memory module and READ LED is on.
- If saving program and parameter is complete, READ LED is off.
(c) Detach the memory module from the main unit.

(2) Downloading the user program in the external memory module into the main unit
(a) Set the operation mode of main unit into STOP.
- You cant download the program into the main unit in RUN mode.
(b) Set the switch of memory module into 1.
(c) Install the memory module
- Install the memory module at RS-232C port of main unit.
- Program and parameter are downloaded into PLC and LED is on.
- If downloading program and parameter is complete, WRITE LED is off.
(d) Change the operation mode into RUN then PLC operates with newly downloaded program and
parameter.

(3) LED blinks in the following case


(a) You try to write the program in the memory module in case operation mode is RUN
(WRITE LED blinks.)
(b) PLC type of program in the memory module is different with main unit.
(WRITE LED blinks.)
(c) Mode switch of memory module is not 0, 1 (RUN LED blinks)
(d) Interface between memory module and main unit is abnormal (READ LED blinks)

Note
-. All program, parameter of XG500 and link information of XG-PD are saved .
-. When PLC is RUN mode, remove the external memory module from main unit.
-. Dont remove the memory module from the main unit when READ/WRITE LED is on.

6- 23
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications


7.1 Introduction
Here describes the notices when selecting digital I/O module used for XGB series.

1) For the type of digital input, there are two types such as current sink input and current source
input.

2) The number of max. Simultaneous input contact point is different according to module type. It
depends on the input voltage, ambient temperature. Use input module after checking the
specification.

3) When response to high speed input is necessary, use interrupt input contact point. Up to 8
interrupt points are supported.

4) In case that open/close frequency is high or it is used for conductive load open/close, use
Transistor output module or triac output module as the durability of Relay Output Module shall
be reduced.

5) For output module to run the conductive (L) load, max. open/close frequency should be used
by 1second On, 1 second Off.

6) For output module, in case that counter timer using DC/DC Converter as a load was used,
Inrush current may flow in a certain cycle when it is ON or during operation. In this case, if
average current is selected, it may cause the failure. Accordingly, if the previous load was
used, it is recommended to connect resistor or inductor to the load in serial in order to reduce
the impact of Inrush current or use the large module having a max. load current value.

Resistor Load Inductor Load


L
module
Output

7-1
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7) Relay life of Relay output module is shown as below.


Max. life of Relay used in Relay output module is shown as below.

100
Open/Close times ( 10000)

50

30
20

10
AC 125V Resistive load

DC 30V Resistive load


AC 250V Resistive load

0.5 1 2 3 5 10 100

Open/Close current (A)

7-2
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

8) A clamped terminal with sleeve can not be used for the XGB terminal strip. The clamped terminals
suitable for terminal strip are as follows (JOR 1.25-3:Daedong Electricity in Korea).

6.0mm or less 6.0mm or less

9) The cable size connected to a terminal strip should be 0.3~0.75 stranded cable and 2.8 thick.
The cable may have different current allowance depending on the insulation thickness.

10) The coupling torque available for fixation screw and terminal strip screw should follow the table below.

Coupling position Coupling torque range


IO module terminal strip screw (M3 screw) 42 ~ 58 N
IO module terminal strip fixation screw 66 ~ 89 N
(M3 screw)

11) Relay life graph is not written based on real use. (This is not a guaranteed value). So consider margin.
Relay life is specified under following condition.

(a) Rated voltage, load: 3 million times: 100 million times


(b) 200V AC 1.5A, 240V AC 1A (COS =0.7): 1 million times
(c) 200V AC 0.4A, 240V AC 0.3A (COS =0.7): 3 million times
(d) 200V AC 1A, 240V AC 0.5A (COS =0.35): 1 million times
(e) 200V AC 0.3A, 240V AC 0.15A (COS =0.35): 3 million times
(f) 24V DC 1A, 100V DC 0.1A (L/R=7ms): 1million times
(g) 24V DC 0.3A, 100V DC 0.03A (L/R=7ms): 3million times

12) Noise can be inserted into input module. To prevent this noise, the user can set filter for input delay in
parameter. Consider the environment and set the input filter time.

Input filter time (ms) Noise signal pulse size (ms) Reference
1 0.3
3 1.8 Initial value
5 3
10 6
20 12
70 45
100 60

7-3
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

(a) Setting input filter


1) Click I/O Parameterin the project window of XG5000

2) ClickModule at the slot location.

7-4
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

3) Set I/O module really equipped.

4) After setting I/O module, click Input Filter.

5) Set filter value.

7-5
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

(b) Setting output status in case of error

1) Click Emergency Out in the I/O parameter setting window.

2) Click Emergency Output.

If it is selected as Clear, the output will be Off and if Hold is selected, the output will be kept.

7-6
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.2 Basic Digital Input Unit Specifications


7.2.1 XBM-DR16S input unit (Source/Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DR16S
Input point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4 (00~03: About 7 )
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher/ 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or lower/ 1 or lower
Input resistance About 5.6 (P00~P03: about 3.3 )

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common Method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Twisted pair 0.3~0.75 (external diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption () 180 (When Input On LED On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection
9 pin terminal block connector
method
Weight 140g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type

TB1 00
TB2 01 TB1
TB3 02 TB2
0 Photo coupler
TB1
R TB4 03 TB3
TB4
R TB5 04
TB5
7
TB8 Internal
Circuit TB6 05 TB6
TB9
COM
TB7 06 TB7
DC24V
TB8
TB8 07
Terminal block no. TB9
TB9 COM

7-7
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.2.2 XBM-DN16S input unit (Source/Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DN16S
Input point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4 (Contact point 0~3: About 7 )
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6 (P00~P03: About 3.3 )

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 180 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 20 pin connector
Weight 100g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type

B10 00 A10 NC
B09 01 A09 NC
B10 A10
B08 02 A08 NC B09 A09
0
B10 Photo coupler B08 A08
R B07 03 A07 NC
B07 A07
R B06 A06
B06 04 A06 NC
B05 A05
F Internal
B03 B04 A04
circuit B05 05 A05 NC
B02 B03 A03
COM B02 A02
B04 06 A04 NC B01 A01
DC24V
B03 07 A03 NC
Terminal block no.
B02 COM A02 NC
B01 COM A01 NC

7-8
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.2.3 XBM-DN32S input unit (Source/Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DN32S
Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4 (Contact point 0~3: About 7 )
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6 (P00~P03: About 3.3 )

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 200 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection
20 pin connector
method
Weight 110g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type

B10 00 A10 08
B09 01 A09 09
B10 A10
0
B10 Photo coupler B08 02 A08 0A B09 A09
R
B08 A08
R
B07 03 A07 0B B07 A07
B06 A06
F Internal B06 04 A06 0C
A03 B05 A05
B02
circuit B04 A04
COM B05 05 A05 0D B03 A03
B02 A02
DC24V B04 06 A04 0E B01 A01
Terminal block no.
B03 07 A03 0F
B02 COM A02 COM
B01 COM A01 COM

7-9
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.2.4 XBC-DR32H / XBC-DN32H input unit (Source/Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBC-DR32H(/DC) XBC-DN32H(/DC)


Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4 (Contact point 0~3: About 7 )
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6 (P00~P03: About 3.3 )

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 200 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection
24 points connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
method
Weight 600g 500g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
TB1 RX
TB2 485+ TB1
TB3 TX TB2
TB3
0
B10
Photocoupler TB4 485- TB4
R
TB5 SG TB5
R TB6 00 TB6
F
TB7
A03 Internal TB7 01 TB8
B02 circuit TB8 02 TB9
COM TB10
TB9 03 TB11
DC24V TB10 04 TB12
TB13
Terminal block no. TB11 05 TB14
TB12 06 TB15
TB13 07 TB16
TB17
TB14 08 TB18
TB15 09 TB19
TB20
TB16 0A TB21
TB17 0B TB22
TB23
TB18 0C TB24
TB19 0D
TB20 0E
TB21 0F
TB22 COM
TB23 24G
TB24 24V

7-10
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.2.5 XBC-DR64H / XBC-DN64H input unit (Source/Sink Type)

Model Basic unit


XBC-DR64H (/DC) XBC-DN64H (/DC)
Speicification
Input point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4 (Contact point 0~3: About 7 )
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6 (P00~P03: About 3.3 )
Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 200 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection
42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
method
Weight 900g 800g
Circuit configuration No. contact No. contact type
TB1 RX
TB2 485+ TB1
TB3 TX TB2
TB4 485- TB3
00 Photo coupler
TB5 SG TB4
TB6
R TB6 00 TB5
TB7 01 TB6
R TB8 02 TB7
0F Internal
TB9 03 TB8
TB21 TB10 04 TB9
TB22
circuit TB11 05 TB10
TB12 06 TB11
COM0
TB13 07 TB12
DC24V TB14 08 TB13
TB15 09 TB14
TB15
10 TB16 0A TB16
Photo coupler
TB24
R TB17 0B TB17
TB18 0C TB18
R TB19 0D TB19
1F
TB20 0E TB20
TB39 TB21 0F TB21
TB40 TB22 COM0 TB22
COM1 TB23 NC TB23
TB24 10 TB24
DC24V TB25 11 TB25
TB26 12 TB26
Terminal block no. TB27
TB27 13
TB28 14 TB28
TB29 15 TB29
TB30 16 TB30
TB31
TB31 17 TB32
TB32 18 TB33
TB33 19 TB34
TB34 1A TB35
TB35 1B TB36
TB36 1C TB37
TB37 1D TB38
TB38 1E TB39
TB39 1F TB40
TB40 COM1 TB41
TB41 24G TB42
TB42 24V

7-11
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3 Basic Digital Output Unit Specification


7.3.1 XBM-DR16S relay output unit

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DR16S
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage / current DC24V 2A(Resistive load) / AC220V 2A(COS = 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/current DC5V / 1
Max. load voltage/current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1 (AC220V, 60 )
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
Service
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS = 0.7) 100,000 times or more
life Electrical
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS = 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ) 100,000 times or more

Response Off On 10 or less


time On Off 12 or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Twisted pair0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 360 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector
Weight 140g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type

TB1 20

DC5V TB2 21
TB1
TB3 22 TB2
TB1 TB3
TB4 23
Internal RY
TB4
circuit TB5
TB5 24
TB8 TB6
TB6 25 TB7
TB9
TB8
TB7 26 TB9
Terminal block no.
TB8 27

TB9 COM

7-12
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.2 XBM-DN16S transistor output unit (Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DN16S
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
General output: 0.2A/ 1point,
Max. load voltage
Output for positioning (P20, P21): 01.A/ 1 point, 2A/1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode

Response Off On 1 or less


time On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 180 (when all point On)
External Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
power supply Current 25 or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 20 pin connector
Weight 100g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
B10 20
B09 21
B08 22
DC5V B07 23
B10 B06 24
B05 25
B10 A10
R B04 26 B09 A09
B03 27 B08 A08
Internal B07 A07
circuit B02 DC12 A06
B06
B03 B01 /24V B05 A05
A10 NC B04 A04
B03 A03
B01,B02 A09 NC B02 A02
A08 NC B01 A01
A01,A02
A07 NC
DC12/24V A06 NC
Terminal block no. A05 NC
A04 NC
A03 NC
A02
COM
A01

7-13
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.3 XBM-DN32S transistor output unit (Sink type)

Model Basic unit

Specification XBM-DN32S
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
General output: 0.2A/ 1point,
Max. load voltage
Output for positioning (P20, P21): 01.A/ 1 point, 2A/1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode

Response Off On 1 or less


time On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 200 (when all point On)
External Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
power supply Current 25 or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 20 pin connector
Weight 110g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
B10 20
B09 21
B08 22
DC5V B07 23
B10 B06 24
B05 25
R B04 26 B10 A10
B09 A09
B03 27
Internal B08 A08
circuit B02 DC12 B07 A07
A03 B01 /24V B06 A06
B05 A05
A10 28 B04 A04
B01,B02 A09 29 B03 A03
A08 2A B02 A02
B01 A01
A01,A02
A07 2B
DC12/24V A06 2C
Terminal block no. A05 2D
A04 2E
A03 2F
A02
COM
A01

7-14
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.4 XBC-DR32H output unit


Model Basic unit

Specification XBC-DR32H (/DC)


Output point 16 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load
DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS = 1), 5A/COM
voltage/current
Min. load
DC5V / 1
voltage/current
Max. load voltage AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1 (AC220V, 60 )
Max. on/off frequency 3,600 times / hour
Surge killer None
Mechanical 20 million or above
Rated load voltage / current one hundred thousand or above
Life AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS = 0.7) one hundred thousand or above
Electrical
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS = 0.35) one hundred thousand or above
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ) one hundred thousand or above

Response Off On 10 or less


time On Off 12 or less
Common method 4 point / COM
Proper cable size Strand wire 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Internal consumption
360 (When all output are on)
current
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 24 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight 600g
Circuit configuration No. contact No. Contact Type

TB5
TB1
AC100
TB2 FG
~ 240V TB1
I RY TB3 TB2
N TB8 TB4 NC TB3
T TB4
COM0 TB9
TB5 20
E TB5
R TB6 21 TB6
N TB10 TB7 22 TB7
A TB8
TB8 23 TB9
l RY
TB13
TB9 COM0 TB10
TB10 24 TB11
C TB12
I COM1 TB14 TB11 25 TB13
R TB12 26 TB14
C TB15
TB15
U TB13 27 TB16
I RY TB14 COM1 TB17
T TB18 TB18
TB15 28 TB19
COM2 TB19 TB16 29 TB20
TB17 2A TB21
TB20 TB22
TB18 2B TB23
RY
TB19 COM2 TB24

TB23 TB20 2C
TB21 2D
COM3 TB24 TB22 2E
TB23 2F
Terminal block no. TB24 COM3

7-15
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.5 XBC-DR64H output unit


Model Basic unit
Specification XBC-DR64H (/DC)
Output point 32 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load
DC24V 2A (resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS = 1), 5A/COM
voltage/current
Min. load
DC5V / 1
voltage/current
Max. load voltage AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1 (AC220V, 60 )
Max. on/off frequency 3,600 times / hour
Surge killer None
Mechanical 20 million or above
Rated load voltage / current one hundred thousand or above
Life AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS = 0.7) one hundred thousand or above
Electrical
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS = 0.35) one hundred thousand or above
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ) one hundred thousand or above
Response Off On 10 or less
time On Off 12 or less
Common method 4 point / COM (COM0~COM3), 8 point / COM (COM4~COM5)
Proper cable size Strand wire 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Internal consumption
720 (When all output are on)
current
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight 900g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact type
TB1 AC100
TB5
TB2 FG
TB3 ~240V TB1
I RY TB2
TB8 TB4 NC
N TB5 20 TB3
TB4
T COM0 TB9 TB6 21 TB5
E TB7 22 TB6
R TB10 TB8 23 TB7
N TB9 COM0 TB8
A RY TB10 24 TB9
l TB13 TB11 25 TB10
TB12 26 TB11
COM1 TB14 TB12
C TB13 27 TB13
I TB15 TB14 COM1 TB14
R TB15 28 TB15
C RY TB16 29 TB16
U TB18 TB17 2A TB17
I TB18 2B TB18
COM2 TB19 TB19 COM2 TB19
T TB20
TB20 2C
TB20 TB21
TB21 2D TB22
TB22 2E TB23
RY TB23 2F TB24
TB23 TB24 COM3 TB25
COM3 TB24 TB25 30 TB26
TB26 31 TB27
TB25 TB27 32 TB28
TB28 33 TB29
TB29 34 TB30
RY TB31
TB32 TB30 35 TB32
TB31 36 TB33
COM4 TB33 TB32 37 TB34
TB33 COM4 TB35
TB34 TB34 38 TB36
TB35 39 TB37
RY TB36 3A TB38
TB41 TB39
TB37 3B TB40
COM5 TB42 TB38 3C TB41
TB39 3D TB42
TB40 3E
TB41 3F
Terminal block no. TB42 COM5

7-16
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.6 XBC-DN32H output unit (Sink type)


Model Basic unit
Specification
XBC-DN32H (/DC)

Output point 16 point


Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load
DC 12 / 24V
voltage/current
Min. load
DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
voltage/current
General output: 0.5A/ 1point,
Max. load voltage
Output for positioning (P20, P21, P22, P23): 01.A/ 1 point, 2A/1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. on/off frequency 4A / 10 or less
Surge killer DC 0.4V or less
Output point Zener diode
Off On 1 or less
Response time
On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 4 point / COM
Proper cable size Strand wire 0.3~0.75 (external diameter 2.8 or less)
Internal consumption
400 (When all output are on)
current
External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
supply Current 25 or less (When connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 24 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight 500g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type

TB05 TB1
DC5V AC100
TB2 FG
R
~240V TB1
TB3
TB08 DC12 TB2
TB4 TB3
I /24V TB4
TB09 TB5 20
N TB5
T DC12/24V TB6 21 TB6
TB10
E TB7 22 TB7
R R TB8 23 TB8
N TB9
TB13
A TB9 COM0 TB10
TB11
l TB14 TB10 24
TB12
DC12/24V TB11 25 TB13
C TB15 TB12 26 TB14
I TB15
R R
TB13 27 TB16
C TB18 TB14 COM1 TB17
U TB15 28 TB18
I TB19 TB19
T
TB16 29 TB20
DC12/24V TB21
TB20 TB17 2A
TB22
TB18 2B TB23
R
TB23 TB19 COM2 TB24
TB20 2C
TB24 TB21 2D
DC12/24V TB22 2E
TB04
TB23 2F
TB24 COM3
Terminal block no.

7-17
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.3.7 XBC-DN64H output unit (Sink type)


Model Basic unit
Specification XBC-DN64H (/DC)
Output point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load
voltage
DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
General output: 0.5A/ 1point,
Max. load current
Output for positioning (P20, P21, P22, P23): 01.A/ 1 point, 2A/1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 or less
On max. voltage drop DC 0.4V or less
Surge killer Zener diode
Response Off On 1 or less
time On Off 1 or less (Rated load, Resistive load)
Common method 4 point / COM (COM0~COM3), 8 point / COM (COM4~COM5)
Proper cable size Strand wire 0.3~0.75 (external diameter 2.8 or less)
Internal consumption
current
500 (When all output are on)
External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (Ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
supply Current 25 or less (when connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight 800g
Circuit configuration No. contact No. contact Type
TB1 AC100
TB05 TB2 FG TB1
DC5V TB3 ~240V TB2
R TB4 DC12 TB3
TB08 /24V TB4
I TB5 20
N TB6 21 TB5
TB09 TB6
T TB7 22 TB7
E DC12/24V TB8 23 TB8
TB10
R TB9 COM0 TB9
N R TB10 24 TB10
A TB13 TB11 25 TB11
TB12 26 TB12
l TB14 TB13
TB13 27 TB14
C DC12/24V TB14 COM1 TB15
TB15 TB15 28 TB16
I
R R
TB16 29 TB17
TB18 TB17 2A TB18
C TB18 2B TB19
U TB19 TB19 COM2 TB20
I TB20 2C TB21
T DC12/24V TB22
TB20 TB21 2D
TB22 2E TB23
TB24
R TB23 2F TB25
TB23
TB24 COM3 TB26
TB24 TB25 30 TB27
TB26 31 TB28
DC12/24V TB27 32 TB29
TB25 TB30
TB28 33
R TB29 34 TB31
TB32 TB32
TB30 35 TB33
TB33 TB31 36 TB34
TB32 37 TB35
DC12/24V TB33 COM4 TB36
TB34
TB34 38 TB37
TB35 39 TB38
R
TB41 TB36 3A TB39
TB40
TB37 3B TB41
TB42 TB38 3C TB42
TB04 DC12/24V TB39 3D
TB40 3E
TB41 3F
Terminal block no. TB42 COM5

7-18
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.4 Digital Input Module Specification


7.4.1 8 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)

Model DC input module

Specification XBE-DC08A
Input point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 30 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection
9 point terminal block connector
method
Weight 52 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type

TB1 0
TB2 1 TB1
0 Photo coupler TB3 2 TB2
TB1
R
TB4 3 TB3
R
TB4
7
TB8 Internal TB5 4
circuit
TB5
TB9
COM
TB6 5 TB6
TB7 6 TB7
DC24V
Terminal block no.
TB8
TB8 7
TB9
TB9 COM

7-19
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Sink/Source type)

Model DC input module

Specification XBE-DC16A
Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 40 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 53 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type

TB1 0
TB2 1 TB1
TB3 2 TB2
TB4 3 TB3
TB4
TB5 4
TB5
TB6 5
TB6
TB7 6 TB7
0 Photo coupler
TB1
R TB8 7 TB8
R TB1 8
TB1
F Internal
TB8
circuit TB2 9 TB2
TB9
COM TB3 A TB3
DC24V TB4 B TB4
Terminal block no. TB5
TB5 C
TB6
TB6 D TB7
TB7 E TB8
TB8 F TB9
TB9 COM TB10

TB10 COM

7-20
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.4.3 32 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)

Model DC input module

Specification XBE-DC32A
Input point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
Input Derating Refer to Derating diagram
On Voltage/Current DC 19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC 6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6

Response Off On
1/3/5/10/20/70/100 (set by CPU parameter) Default:3
time On Off
Insulation pressure AC 560Vrms / 3 Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10 or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 50 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 10
B19 01 A19 11
0 Photo coupler
B20 R B18 02 A18 12
B17 03 A17 13 B20 A20
R
B19 A19
1F
B03 Internal B16 04 A16 14 B18 A18
B02 circuit B15 05 A15 15 B17 A17
COM B16 A16
B14 06 A14 16
B15 A15
DC24V
Terminal block no. B13 07 A13 17 B14 A14
B12 08 A12 18 B13 A13
Input Derating diagram B12 A12
B11 09 A11 19 B11 A11
100 B10 0A A10 1A B10 A10
90 B09 A09
B09 0B A09 1B B08 A08
80 DC28.8V B08 0C A08 1C B07 A07
On rate (%)

70 B06 A06
B07 0D A07 1D B05 A05
60 B06 0E A06 1E B04 A04
50 B03 A03
B05 0F A05 1F B02 A02
40 A01
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 B04 NC A04 NC B01

Ambient temperature () B03 NC A03 NC


B02 COM A02 COM
B01 COM A01 COM

7-21
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.5 Digital Output Module Specification


7.5.1 8 point relay output module

Model Relay output module

Specification XBE-RY08A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage / Current DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS = 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/Current DC5V / 1
Max. load voltage/Current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1 (AC220V, 60 )
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
Service life AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS = 0.7) 100,000 times or more
Electrical
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS = 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ) 100,000 times or more

Response Off On 10 or less


time On Off 12 or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Twisted pair0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 230 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector
Weight 80g

Circuit configuration No. Contact Type

TB1 0

DC5V TB2 1

TB3 2 TB1
TB1 TB2
TB4 3 TB3
Internal RY
circuit TB4
TB5 4
TB8 TB5
TB6 5 TB6
TB9
TB7
TB7 6 TB8
Terminal block no. TB9
TB8 7

TB9 COM

7-22
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.5.2 16 point relay output module

Model Relay output module

Specification XBE-RY16A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage/ current DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS = 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/current DC5V / 1
Max. load voltage/current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1 (AC220V, 60 )
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
Service
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS = 0.7) 100,000 times or more
life Electrical
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS = 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ) 100,000 times or more

Response Off On 10 or less


time On Off 12 or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Twisted pair0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 420 (when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector x 2 ea
Weight 130g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0
TB2 1 TB1
TB3 2 TB2
DC5V TB3
TB4 3
TB4
TB5 4 TB5
TB1 TB6 5 TB6
Internal RY TB7 6 TB7
circuit TB8 7 TB8
TB8 TB9 COM TB9

TB9 TB1 8
TB1
TB2 9 TB2
TB3 A TB3
Terminal block no.
TB4 B TB4
TB5 C TB5
TB6 D TB6
TB7 E TB7
TB8
TB8 F
TB9
TB9 COM

7-23
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.5.3 8 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model Transistor output module

Specification XBE-TN08A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.5A / 1 point
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode

Response Off On 1 or less


time On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 40 (when all point On)
External Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
power
supply Current 10 or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection
10 point terminal block connector
method
Weight 53
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0

DC5V TB02 1
TB01 TB01
TB03 2 TB02
R TB04 3 TB03
Internal TB04
circuit TB05 4 TB05
TB08
TB06 5 TB06
TB07
TB09 TB07 6
TB08
TB10 TB08 7 TB09
DC12/24V DC12 TB10
TB09
Terminal block no.
/24V
TB10 COM

7-24
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.5.4 16 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model Transistor output module

Specification XBE-TN16A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode

Response Off On 1 or less


time On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 (External diameter 2.8 or less)
Current consumption 60 (when all point On)

External Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)


power supply Current 10 or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 54 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0
TB02 1 TB01
TB02
TB03 2
TB03
DC5V TB04 3 TB04
TB10 TB05 4 TB05
TB06 5 TB06
R TB07 6 TB07
TB08 7 TB08
Internal
circuit TB01 8
TB01
TB08 TB02 9
TB03 A TB02
TB03
TB09 TB04 B
TB04
TB05 C
TB10 TB05
TB06 D
TB06
DC12/24V TB07 E
TB07
Terminal block no. TB08 F TB08
DC12
TB09 TB09
/24V
TB10
TB10 COM

7-25
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.5.5 32 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model Transistor output module

Specification XBE-TN32A
Output point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1 or less
Max. inrush current 0.7A / 10 or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Off On 1 or less
Response time
On Off 1 or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 120 (when all point On)

External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)


supply Current 20 or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 10
B19 01 A19 11
DC5V B18 02 A18 12
B20 A20
B20 B17 03 A17 13 B19 A19
B16 04 A16 14 B18 A18
B17 A17
B15 05 A15 15 B16 A16
R
B14 06 A14 16 B15 A15
Internal B14 A14
B13 07 A13 17
circuit B13 A13
B12 08 A12 18 B12 A12
A05 B11
B11 09 A11 19 A11
B10 A10
B10 0A A10 1A B09 A09
B01,B02 B08 A08
B09 0B A09 1B
B07 A07
A01,A02 B08 0C A08 1C B06 A06
DC12/24V B07 0D A07 1D B05 A05
Terminal block no. B04 A04
B06 0E A06 1E B03 A03
B05 0F A05 1F B02 A02
B01 A01
B04 NC A04 NC
B03 NC A03 NC
B02 DC12/ A02
COM
B01 24V A01

7-26
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

7.6 IO Wiring by Using Smart Link Board

7.6.1 Smart link board

Easy wiring is available by connecting the IO connector with smart link board.
The available smart link and IO cable are as follows.

XGB Smart link Connection cable


The no.
Classification Model Model Model Length Content
of pin
XBM-DN32S For main unit connection
Main unit SLP-T40P 40 SLT-CT101-XBM 1m
XBM-DN16S (20Pin + 20Pin)

XBE-DC32A SLP-T40P 40 SLT-CT101-XBE 1m For extension module


connection
SLP-T40P 40 SLT-CT101-XBE 1m (40Pin)
Extension
For extension module
module XBE-TN32A connection (40Pin)
SLP-RY4A 40 SLP-CT101-XBE 1m
Exclusive for relay built-in
SLP type

It describes wring of XGB, SLP-T40P and SLT-CT101-XBM.


For wring of other smart link boards or XGB extension module, refer to XGB user manual for hardware.

(1) SLT-T40P terminal array

Terminal array of SLP-T40P is as follows.

Item Specification
Rated voltage AC/DC 125[V]
Rated current Max. 1[A]
Withstanding
600V 1min
voltage
Insulation
100 (DC500V)
resistor
Cable
1.25[] or below
specification
Terminal/screw M3 X 8L
6.2 f. or
Torque
above
Terminal
PBT, UL94V-0
material
Weight 186g

7-27
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications

(2) Wiring of SLT-T40P and XGB main unit


Wiring of XGB main unit through SLP-T40P and SLT-CT101-XBM is as follows.

XBM-DN32S

SLT-CT101-XBM

SLP-T40P

At this time, relationship of XGB IO signal and Smart link board terminal number is as follows.
The following figure describes signal allocation when SLT-CT101-XBM is used as connection cable.
When the user makes the cable, make sure that wring is done as figure below.

7-28
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function


XGB series have built-in function of High-speed counter in basic unit. This chapter describes specifications
and usage of High-speed counters function.

8.1 High-speed Counter Specifications


It describes specifications, setting and usage of function, programming and wiring with external
device of built-in basic unit.

8.1.1 Performance specifications


1) Performance specification
Description
Classification
S type H type

Count input Signal A-phase, B-phase


Input type Voltage input (Open collector)
signal
Signal level 24V
Max. coefficient speed 20 kpps 100 kpps
1 phase 4 (20kpps 4 channels) 8 (10kpps 4 channels/20kpps 4 channels)
Number of
In case of 2 multiplication: 10kpps (50kpps 2 channels/ 10kpps 2 channels)
channels 2 phase 2 4
In case of 4 multiplication: 8kpps (50kpps 2 channels/ 8kpps 2 channels)

Coefficient range Signed 32 Bit (-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647)


Linear count (if 32-bit range exceeded, Carry/Borrow occurs)
Count mode
Counter max. and min. value is indicated
(Program setting)
Ring count (repeated count within setting range)
Input mode 1-phase input
2-phase input
(Program setting)
CW/CCW input
Signal type Voltage
Increasing/decreasing operation setting by B-phase input
1 phase input
Up/Down Increasing/decreasing operation setting by program
2 phase input Automatic setting by difference in phase
setting
A-phase input: increasing operation
CW/CCW
B-phase input: decreasing operation
Multiplication 1 phase input 1 multiplication
2 phase input 4 multiplication
function
CW/CCW 1 multiplication
Signal Preset instruction input
Control input Signal level DC 24V input type
Signal type Voltage
1 point/channel (for each channel) 2 point/channel (for each channel)
Output points :output contact point of basic unit :output contact point of basic unit
External available available
output Select single-compared (>, >=, =, =<, <) or section compared output
Type
(included or excluded) (program setting)
Output type Relay, Open-collector output (Sink)

8-1
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
Description
Classification
S type H type

Count Enable To be set through program (count available only in enable status)

Preset function To be set through terminal (contact) or program


Auxiliary mode Count Latch

2) Counter/Preset input specification

Classification Spcification

Input voltage 24V DC (20.4V ~ 28.8V)

Input current 4

On guranteed voltage (min.) 20.4V

Off guranteed voltage (max.) 6V

8.1.2 Designation of parts


1) Designation of parts

Name Stype H type


XBM-DN16/32S XBM-DR16S XBC-DN32/64H,XBC-DR32.64H
B A B A

P00 P00
P01 P01
P02 P02
P03 P03
P04 P04
Structure P05 P05
P06 P06
P07 P07
COM
COM
COM

8-2
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(a) S type
Terminal Names Usage
No. 1-phase 2-phase 1-phase 2-phase
P000 Ch0 counter input Ch0 A-phase input Counter input terminal A-phase input
P001 Ch1 counter input Ch0 B-phase input Counter input terminal B-phase input
P002 Ch2 counter input Ch2 A-phase input Counter input terminal A-phase input
P003 Ch3 counter input Ch2 B-phase input Counter input terminal B-phase input
P004 Ch0 preset 24V Ch0 preset 24V Preset input terminal Preset input terminal
P005 Ch1 preset 24V - Preset input terminal No use
P006 Ch2 preset 24V Ch2 preset 24V Preset input terminal Preset input terminal
P007 Ch3 preset 24V - Preset input terminal No use
COM0 Input common Input common Common terminal Common terminal
(b) H type

Terminal Names Usage


No. 1-phase 2-phase 1-phase 2-phase
Counter input
P000 Ch0 counter input Ch0 A-phase input A-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P001 Ch1 counter input Ch0 B-phase input B-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P002 Ch2 counter input Ch2 A-phase input A-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P003 Ch3 counter input Ch2 B-phase input B-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P004 Ch4 counter input Ch4 A-phase input A-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P005 Ch5 counter input Ch4 B-phase input B-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P006 Ch6 counter input Ch6 A-phase input A-phase input
terminal
Counter input
P007 Ch7 counter input Ch6 B-phase input B-phase input
terminal
Preset input Preset input
P008 Ch0 preset 24V Ch0 preset 24V
terminal terminal
Preset input
P009 Ch1 preset 24V - No use
terminal
Preset input Preset input
P00A Ch2 preset 24V Ch2 preset 24V
terminal terminal
Preset input
P00B Ch4 preset 24V - No use
terminal
Preset input Preset input
P00C Ch5 preset 24V Ch4 preset 24V
terminal terminal
Preset input
P00D Ch6 preset 24V - No use
terminal
Preset input Preset input
P00E Ch7 preset 24V Ch6 preset 24V
terminal terminal
Preset input
P00F Ch8 preset 24V - No use
terminal
COM0 Input common Input common Input common Input common

8-3
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

2) Interface with external devices


The internal circuit of High-speed counter is as shown below.
(a) S type
Signal On/Off

Operation
Terminal
I/O Internal circuit guaranteed
No. 1-phase 2-phase
voltage

Ch 0 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
3.3 k P00
Pulse input A-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 1 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
3.3 k P01
Pulse input B-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 2 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P02
3.3 k Pulse input A-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 3 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P03
3.3 k Pulse input B-phase input Off 6V or less
Input
Ch 0 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
P04
5.6 k Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 1 On 20.4~28.8V
P05 -
Preset input Off 6V or less
5.6 k

Ch 2 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P06
5.6 k Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less
Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P07 -
5.6 k
Preset input Off 6V or less
COM0 COM (input common)

8-4
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Signal On/Off

Operation
Terminal
I/O Internal circuit guaranteed
No. 1-phase 2-phase
voltage
Ch 0 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
P0000
2.7 k Pulse input A-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 1 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
P0001
2.7 k Pulse input B-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 2 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P0002
2.7 k Pulse input A-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 3 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P0003
2.7 k Pulse input B-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 4 Ch 4 On 20.4~28.8V
P0004
2.7 k Pulse input A-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 5 Ch 4 On 20.4~28.8V
P0005
2.7 k Pulse input B-phase input Off 6V or less

Ch 6 On 20.4~28.8V
Ch 6
2.7 k P0006 A-phase
Pulse input Off 6V or less
input
2.7 k
Ch 6 On 20.4~28.8V
Ch 7
P0007 B-phase
Pulse input Off 6V or less
Input 5.6 k input

Ch 0 Ch 0 On 20.4~28.8V
P0008
5.6 k Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 1 On 20.4~28.8V
P0009 -
5.6 k Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 2 Ch 2 On 20.4~28.8V
P000A
5.6 k Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 3 On 20.4~28.8V
P000B -
5.6 k Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 4 Ch 4 On 20.4~28.8V
P000C
Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less
5.6 k
Ch 5 On 20.4~28.8V
P000D -
5.6 k Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 6 Ch 6 On 20.4~28.8V
P000E
5.6 k Preset input Preset input Off 6V or less

Ch 7 On 20.4~28.8V
P000F -
Preset input Off 6V or less

COM0 COM (input common)

8-5
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.1.3 S type Functions


1) Counter mode
A) High Speed counter module can count High Speed pulses which can not be processed by CPU
modules counter instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD, etc.), up to binary value of 32 bits (-
2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647).
B) Available input is 1-phase input, 2-phase input and CW/ CCW input.
C) Count increasing/decreasing methods are as follows;
(1) For 1-phase input: (1) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
(2) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
(2) For 2-phase input: setting by difference in phase between A-phase and B-phase
(3) For CW/CCW input: Increasing operation if B-phase is LOW with A-phase input, and
Decreasing operation if A-phase is LOW with B-phase input.
D) Auxiliary modes are as follows;
Count Latch
Periodic Pulse Count

E) Pulse input mode


(1) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
a) 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by the
applicable program.

Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse A-phase input pulse


rising falling
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal Off Increasing count -
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal On Decreasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse


Increasing/Decreasing On
count setting signal Off

Count value 10 11 12 13 12 11 10 11

Increasing Decreasing Increasing

8-6
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(2) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal


a) 1-phase 2-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by B-
phase.
Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse A-phase input pulse
rising falling

B-phase input pulse Off Increasing count -


B-phase input pulse On Decreasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse Off On

Count value 7 8 9 10 9 8 7 8
Increasing Decreasing Increasing

2) 2-phase count mode


a) 2-phase 4-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse and B-phase input pulse count at rising/falling respectively. If A-phase
input is antecedent to B-phase input, increasing operation starts, and if B-phase input is
antecedent to A-phase input, decreasing operation starts.

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse

Count value 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1514 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Increasing Decreasing

8-7
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

3) CW(Clockwise)/CCW(Counter Clockw`ise) operation mode


A-phase input pulse counts at rising , or B-phase input pulse counts at rising.
Increasing operation executed when B-phase input pulse is Low with A-phase input pulse at
rising, and Decreasing operation executed when A-phase input pulse is Low with B-phase
input pulse at rising.
Increasing/Decreasing
A-phase input pulse High A-phase input pulse Low
classification
B-phase input pulse High - decreasing count

B-phase input pulse Low Increasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse

7 8 9 10 11 10 9 8 7
Count value
Increasing Decreasing

(2) Counter type


2 types of count (Linear counter, Ring counter) can be selected for the applicable use based on
functions.

Counter mode is saved at the following special K area.


Area per each channel (word)
Mode Reference*1)
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Counter 0 : linear
K300 K330 K360 K390
mode 1 : ring
*1) If counter mode is set as value other than 0, 1, error code 20 will occur.

8-8
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

2 types of count can be selected for the applicable use based on functions.
A) Linear counter
Linear Count range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
If count value reaches the maximum value while increased, Carry will occur, and if count
value reaches the minimum value while decreased, Borrow will occur.
If Carry occurs, count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available.
If Borrow occurs, count stops and decreasing is not available but increasing is available.

+2,147,483,647

Decreasing Increasing

-2,147,483,648
Count start point
Borrow

Carry

B) Ring count
Ring Count range: user-defined minimum value ~ user-defined maximum value
Count display: If Ring Counted, user-defined minimum value of Ring Count is counted and
displayed, but the value is not displayed.

Ring counter value is saved at the following special K area.


Area per each channel (Double word)
type Reference
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Ring counter
K310 K340 K270 K400
value

8-9
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(1)During increasing count


Even if count value exceeds user-defined maximum value during increasing count,
Carry only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.

Carry occurred
Ring Count
maximum value

Preset value
Present position :Not included
:Included
Ring Count
minimum value

(2) During decreasing count


Even if count value exceeds user-defined minimum value during decreasing count,
Borrow only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.

Ring Count
maximum value
Present position
Preset value
:Not included
:Included

Ring Count
Minimum value (0)
Borrow occurred

(3) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during increasing
count)
If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to increase up to the user-defined maximum value and
down to the user-defined minimum value and keeps counting after Carry occurs.
- Not the maximum but the minimum value only is displayed with count kept on as
shown below.

8-10
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Carry occurred
2,147,483,647
Carry occurred
Ring Count
maximum value

Present position
Ring Count
minimum value (0) :Not included
:Included
Present position
-2,147,483,648
If out of the user-defined If within the user-defined range
range

(4) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during decreasing count)
If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to decrease down to the user-defined minimum value and up to
the user-defined maximum value and keeps counting after Borrow occurs.

2,147,483,647
Ring Count
maximum value Present position

Present
Ring Count position
minimum value Borrow occurred
:Not included
:Included
Borrow occurred
-2,147,483,648
If out of the user- If within the user-
defined range defined range

Remark

1. Based on count value within or out of user-defined range, count will be decided to be within or out
of the range when setting Ring Count.

2. Ring Count setting when count value is out of the range is regarded as users mistake. The count
is not available within the Ring Count range.
3. Use preset function or the like when using Ring Count so to surely position the count value within
the range.

8-11
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

3) Compared output
(a) High Speed counter module has a compared output function used to compare present count
value with compared value in size to output as compared.
(b) Available compared outputs are 2 for 1 channel, which can be used separately.
(c) Compared output conditions are 7 associated with >, =, < .
(d) Parameter setting
Compared output mode setting

Upper setting value is saved in special K area.


Compared output condition Memory address (word) Value*2)
Present Value < Compared Value Set to 0
Present Value Compared Value Set to 1
Present Value = Compared Value Channel 0 : K302 Set to 2
Channel 1 : K330
Present Value Compared Value Channel 2 : K358 Set to 3
Present Value > Compared Value Channel 3 : K386 Set to 4
Compared value 1 Count value Compared value 2 Set to 5
Count value Compared value 1,
Set to 6
Count value Compared value 2
*2) If compared output value not set to 0~6 using counter, error code 23 will be occurred.

In order to make actual comparison enabled after compared output condition set, the
compared enable signal is to be On.
Area per channel
Classification Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 3
Count enable signal K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900 0: N/A, 1: enable

Compared enable signal K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904 0: forbidden, 1: enable

8-12
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

In order to make external output, the compared equivalent output signal (P20~P27) must be
set. If Compared output contact is Off, Compared coincidence output signal (internal device)
is only output.
Area per channel
Classification Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 3
0: Compared output not
Compared equivalent equivalent
K2612 K2712 K2812 K2912
output signal 1: Compared output
equivalent

Comp output point (P20 ~ P27) setting

8-13
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(e) Detailed description for compared output


A) Mode 0 (Present value < Compared value)
If counted present value is less than compared value, output is sent out, and if present
value increases to be equal to or greater than compared value, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared output
Min. set value 123460

Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
output signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

B) Mode1 (Count value Compared value)


If present count value is less than or equal to compared value, output is sent out, and if
count value increases to be greater than compared value, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared Output
Min. set value 123460

Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
output signal
External output
(in case of
designated output)

8-14
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

C) Mode 2 (Count value = Compared value)


If present count value is equal to compared value, output is sent out. In order to turn the
output Off, Compared output Enable and Compared output signal is to be On.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared Output
Min. set value 123457

Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
output signal
External output
(in case of
designated output)

D) Mode 3 (Count value Compared value)


If present count value is greater than or equal to compared value, output is sent out, and if
count value decreases to be less than compared value, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462

Compared Output
123460
Min. set value

Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
output signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

8-15
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

E) Mode 4 (Count value > Compared value)


If present count value is greater than compared value, output is sent out, and if count value
decreases to be less than or equal to compared value, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462

Compared Output
123459
Min. set value

Compared Output
Enable
Compared Output
signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

F) Mode 5 (Compared output Min. set value Count value Compared output Max. set value)
If present count value is greater than or equal to compared output Min. value and less than
or equal to compared output Max. set value, output is sent out, and if count value
increases/decreases to exceed compared values range, output is not sent out.

Count value
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
Compared Output
Min. set value
123458
Compared Output
Max. set value 123460

Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
signal

External Output
(in case of
designated output)

8-16
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

G) Mode 6 (Count value Compared output Min. value, Count value Compared output
Max. value)
If present count value is less than or equal to compared output Min. value and greater than
or equal to compared output Max. value, output is sent out, and if count value
increases/decreases to exceed compared values range, output is not sent out.

Count value
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
Compared Output
Min. set value
123457
Compared Output
Max. set value 123461
Compared Output
Enable

Compared Output
output signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

8-17
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4) Carry signal
A) Carry signal occurs
(1) When count range maximum value of 2,147,483,647 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined maximum value of Ring Count changed to the minimum value during Ring
Count.
B) Count when Carry Signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Carry occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Carry occurs during Ring Count.
C) Carry reset
(1) The Carry generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.

Device area per channel


Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Carry signal K2610 K2710 K2810 K2910

5) Borrow signal
A) Borrow signal occurs
(1) When count range minimum value of -2,147,483,648 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined minimum value of Ring Count changed to the maximum value during
Ring Count.
B) Count when Borrow signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Borrow occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Borrow occurs during Ring Count.
C) Borrow reset
(1) The Borrow generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On..

Device area per channel


Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K2911

8-18
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

6) Revolution/Unit time
While auxiliary mode enable signal is On, it counts the number of input pulses for a specified time.
A) Setting
(1) Unit time setting
1) Input unit time and pulse number per 1 revolution

Setting value is saved at the following special K are and user can designate it directly.
Device area per channel
Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Unit time (1~60000)*3) K322 K352 K382 K412
*3)
If revolution per unit time is enabled and unit time value is other than 1~60000ms, error code
34 occurs.
2) Input pulse number per 1 revolution
Device area per channel
Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Pulse number /revolution
K323 K353 K383 K413
(1~60000)*4)
*4)
If revolution per unit time is enabled and pulse number/revolution is other than 1~60000,
error code 35 occurs.
3) If Count function of revolution per unit time is used, enable signal set by On.
Device area per channel
Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Revolution/unit time
K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905
command

B) Count function of Revolution per Unit time is used to count the number of pulses for a
specified time while Enable signal is On.

8-19
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

C) With the displayed number of pulses updated for a specified time and the number of
pulses per revolution input, Revolution/Unit time can be counted.
D) Number of Revolution per 1 second is indicated after number of pulse per 1 revolution is
set and time is set to 1 second (1000ms). In order to indicate by Revolutions per minute
(RPM), the operation is executed in program.
E) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to 1 and time is set to 1000 ms is
as shown below. (Ch0)

Command

1000
700
Count value

500 500

400
300 350
0

Revolution 300 100 300 200


per time
(K264) 1000 1000 1000 1000

F) In order to indicate revolution per minute (RPM), the program is as shown below. In case
of DMUL operation, RPM value is saved 64 bit in D100~D103. If operated RPM value is
used, it can use to Word or Dword type according to system (case of RPM value is small
number).

8-20
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

G) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to 10 and time is set to 60,000 ms
is as shown below.

Command

1000
700
Count value

500 500

400
300 350
0

Revolution 30 10 30 20
per time
60000 60000 60000 60000

7) Count latch

(a) When Count latch signal is On, present count value is latched.
(b) Setting
If present counter value is to latch, Count Latch function is set Use.
Device area per channel
Classification
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Count latch command K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906

Count latch function is operated when Count latch signal is On. Namely, counter value is not
cleared when power supply Off =>On and mode change, it is counted from previous value.
In latch counter function, internal or external preset function has to use for clearing present
value.

8-21
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8) Preset function
It changes the current value into preset value.
There are two types of preset function, internal preset and external preset. External preset is fixed
as input contact point.

Preset setting value is saved at the following special K area.


Area per each channel (Double word)
Type Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Internal preset K304 K334 K364 K394 -
External preset K306 K336 K366 K396 -

Preset command is specified through the following special K area, external preset is used by
executing the designated input contact point after allowance bit is on.
Area per each channel (Bit)
Type Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Internal preset
K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901 -
command
External preset
K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902 -
allowance
External preset
P008 P009 P00A P00B -
command

8-22
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.1.4 H type Functions


1) Counter mode
A) High Speed counter module can count High Speed pulses which can not be processed by CPU
modules counter instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD, etc.), up to binary value of 32 bits (-
2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647).
B) Available input is 1-phase input, 2-phase input and CW/ CCW input.
C) Count increasing/decreasing methods are as follows;
(1) For 1-phase input: (1) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
(2) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
(2) For 2-phase input: setting by difference in phase between A-phase and B-phase
(3) For CW/CCW input: Increasing operation if B-phase is LOW with A-phase input, and
Decreasing operation if A-phase is LOW with B-phase input.
D) Auxiliary modes are as follows;
Count Latch
Count function about the number of revolution per unit time

E) Pulse input mode


1) 1 phase count mode
A) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
a) 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by the
applicable program.

Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse A-phase input pulse


rising falling
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal Off Increasing count -
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal On Decreasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse


Increasing/Decreasing On
count setting signal Off

Count value 10 11 12 13 12 11 10 11

Increasing Decreasing Increasing

8-23
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

B) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal


b) 1-phase 2-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by B-phase.
Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse A-phase input pulse
rising falling

B-phase input pulse Off Increasing count -


B-phase input pulse On Decreasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse Off On

Count value 7 8 9 10 9 8 7 8
Increasing Decreasing Increasing

2) 2-phase count mode


a) 2-phase 4-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse and B-phase input pulse count at rising/falling respectively. If A-phase
input is antecedent to B-phase input, increasing operation starts, and if B-phase input is
antecedent to A-phase input, decreasing operation starts.

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse

Count value 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 1514 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Increasing Decreasing

8-24
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

3) CW(Clockwise)/CCW(Counter Clockwise) operation mode


A-phase input pulse counts at rising , or B-phase input pulse counts at rising.
Increasing operation executed when B-phase input pulse is Low with A-phase input pulse at
rising, and Decreasing operation executed when A-phase input pulse is Low with B-phase
input pulse at rising.
Increasing/Decreasing
A-phase input pulse High A-phase input pulse Low
classification
B-phase input pulse High - decreasing count
B-phase input pulse Low Increasing count -

Operation example

A-phase input pulse

B-phase input pulse

7 8 9 10 11 10 9 8 7
Count value
Increasing Decreasing

2) Counter mode
2 types of count (Linear counter, Ring counter) can be selected for the applicable use based on
functions.

Counter mode is saved at the following special K area.


Area per each channel (word)
Mode Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Counter 0 : linear
K300 K330 K360 K390 K2220 K2250 K2280 K2310
mode 1 : ring

8-25
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

A) Linear counter
Linear Count range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
If count value reaches the maximum value while increased, Carry will occur, and if count
value reaches the minimum value while decreased, Borrow will occur.
If Carry occurs, count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available.
If Borrow occurs, count stops and decreasing is not available but increasing is available.

+2,147,483,647

Decreasing Increasing

-2,147,483,648
Count start point
Borrow

Carry

B) Ring count
Set Ring Counter Min. Value and Max. value. Preset value and compared set value should
be in range of ring counter min. value and max. value.

Ring counter max. and min value is saved at the following special K area.
Area per each channel (Double word)
type Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Ring counter
K308 K338 K368 K398 K2228 K2258 K2288 K2318 -
min. value
Ring counter
K310 K340 K270 K400 K2230 K2260 K2290 K2320 -
max. value

8-26
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Range of Ring counter: user defined min. value ~ user defined max. value
Counter display: in case of using ring counter, user defined max. value is not displayed.
a. During increasing count
Even if count value exceeds user-defined maximum value during increasing count,
Carry only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.

Carry occurred
Ring Count
maximum value

Preset value
Present position :Not included
:Included
Ring Count
minimum value

b. During decreasing count


Even if count value exceeds user-defined minimum value during decreasing count,
Borrow only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.

Ring Count
maximum value
Present position
Preset value
:Not included
:Included

Ring Count
Minimum value (0)
Borrow occurred

c. Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during increasing
count)
If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to increase up to the user-defined maximum value and
down to the user-defined minimum value and keeps counting after Carry occurs.
- Not the maximum but the minimum value only is displayed with count kept on as
shown below.

8-27
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Carry occurred
2,147,483,647
Carry occurred
Ring Count
maximum value

Present position
Ring Count
minimum value (0) :Not included
:Included
Present position
-2,147,483,648
If out of the user-defined If within the user-defined range
range

d. Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during decreasing count)
If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to decrease down to the user-defined minimum value and up to
the user-defined maximum value and keeps counting after Borrow occurs.

2,147,483,647
Ring Count
maximum value Present position

Ring Count Present


minimum value position Borrow occurred
:Not included
:Included
Borrow occurred
-2,147,483,648
If out of the user- If within the user-
defined range defined range

Remark

1. Based on count value within or out of user-defined range, count will be decided to be within or out
of the range when setting Ring Count.

2. Ring Count setting when count value is out of the range is regarded as users mistake. The count
is not available within the Ring Count range.
3. Use preset function or the like when using Ring Count so to surely position the count value within
the range.

8-28
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(3) Compared output


(a) High Speed counter module has a compared output function used to compare present count
value with compared value in size to output as compared.
(b) Available compared outputs are 2 for 1 channel, which can be used separately.
(c) Compared output conditions are 7 associated with >, =, < .
(d) Parameter setting
Comp. output mode setting

Upper setting value is saved in special K area.


Memory address (word)
Compared output condition Value*2)
Comp output 0 Comp output 1
Present Value < Compared Value Set to 0
Present Value Compared Value Ch.0 K302 Ch.0 K303 Set to 1
Ch.1 K332 Ch.1 K333
Present Value = Compared Value Ch.2 K362 Ch.2 K363 Set to 2
Present Value Compared Value Ch.3 K392 Ch.3 K393 Set to 3
Ch.4 K2222 Ch.4 K2223
Present Value > Compared Value Ch.5 K2252 Ch.5 K2253 Set to 4
Ch.6 K2282 Ch.6 K2283
Compared value 1 Count value Compared value 2 Set to 5
Ch.7 K2312 Ch.7 K2313
Count value Compared value 1,
Set to 6
Count value Compared value 2
*2)
If compared output mode set value is other than 0~6 at using counter, error code 23 occurs.

8-29
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

In order to output the compared output signal, compared output enable flag set to 1 after
compared output condition set.
Area per channel
Classification Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 3 Ch. 4 Ch. 5 Ch. 6 Ch. 7
Count enable 0:disable, 1:
K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900 K21800 K21900 K22000 K22100
signal enable

Compared 0 0: disable, 1:
K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904 K21804 K21904 K22004 K22104
enable signal enable

Compared 1 0: disable, 1:
K2607 K2707 K2807 K2907 K21807 K21907 K22007 K22107
enable signal enable

In order to make external output, the compared coincidence output signal (P20~P2F) must
be set. If Compared output contact is Off at Special Module Parameter Setting of XG5000,
Compared coincidence output signal (internal device) is only output.
Area per channel
Classification Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch. 6 Ch.7
Compared coincidence 0: Compared output Off
K2612 K2712 K2812 K2912 K21812 K22012 K22112
output signal 0 1: Compared output On
Compared coincidence 0: Compared output Off
K2613 K2713 K2813 K2913 K21813 K22013 K22113
output signal 1 1: Compared output On

Comp. output point (P20 ~ P2F) setting

8-30
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(e) Detail of comparator output


It describes detail of comparator output (based on comparator output 0)
1) Mode 0 (Present value < Compared value)
If counted present value is less than the minimum value of compared output 0, output
is sent out, and if present value increases to be equal to or greater than the minimum
value of compared output 0, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared output 0
min. set value 123460

Compared output 0
Enable

Compared output 0
Output Signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

2) Mode1 (Count value Compared value)


If present count value is less than or equal to the minimum set value of compared
output 0, output is sent out, and if count value increases to be greater than the
minimum set value of compared output 0, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared output 0
Min. set value 123460

Compared Output 0
Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal

External output
(in case of
designated output)

8-31
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

3) Mode 2 (Count value = Compared value)


If present count value is equal to the minimum set value of compared output 0, output is sent
out. In order to turn the output Off, Compared output Enable signal 0 or Compared
Coincidence Output Enable signal 0 is to be Off.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared output 0
Min. set value 123457

Compared Output 0
Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal
External output
(in case of designated output)

D) Mode 3 (Count value Compared value)


If present count value is greater than or equal to the minimum set value of compared output
0, output is sent out, and if count value decreases to be less than the minimum set value of
compared output 0, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared output 0
Min. set value 123460

Compared Output 0
Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal
External output
(in case of designated output)

8-32
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

E) Mode 4 (Count value > Compared Output value)


If present count value is greater than the minimum set value of compared output 0, output is
sent out, and if count value decreases to be less than or equal to the minimum set value of
compared output 0, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared Output 0
Min. set value 123459

Compared Output 0
output Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal
External output
(in case of designated output)

F) Mode 5
(Section comparison: Min. set value of Compared Output 0 Count value Max. set value
of Compared Output 0)
If present count value is greater than or equal to the minimum set value of compared
output 0 and less than or equal to the maximum set value of compared output 0, output is
sent out, and if count value increases/decreases to exceed compared values range,
output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared Output 0
Min. set value
123458
Compared Output 0
Max. set value
123460

Compared Output 0
output Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal

External output
(in case of designated output)

8-33
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

G) Mode 6 (Count value Min. set value of Compared Output 0 or Count value Max. set
value of Compared Output 0)

If present count value is less than or equal to the minimum set value of compared 0 and
greater than or equal to the maximum set value of compared 0, output is sent out, and if
count value increases/decreases to exceed compared values range, output is not sent out.

Count value 123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462


Compared Output 0
Min. set value 123457
Compared Output 0
123461
Max. set value
Compared Output 0
output Enable

Compared Output 0
output signal

External output
(in case of designated

8-34
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4) Carry signal
A) Carry signal occurs
(1) When count range maximum value of 2,147,483,647 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined maximum value of Ring Count changed to the minimum value during Ring
Count.
B) Count when Carry Signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Carry occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Carry occurs during Ring Count.
C) Carry reset
(1) The Carry generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.

Device area per channel


Classification
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Carry signal K2610 K2710 K2810 K2910 K21810 K21910 K22010 K22110

5) Borrow signal
A) Borrow signal occurs
(1) When count range minimum value of -2,147,483,648 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined minimum value of Ring Count changed to the maximum value during
Ring Count.
B) Count when Borrow signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Borrow occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Borrow occurs during Ring Count.
C) Borrow reset
(1) The Borrow generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.

Device area per channel


Classification
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K2911 K21811 K21911 K22011 K22111

8-35
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

6) Revolution/Unit time
While the Flag about the number of revolution per unit time is On, it counts the number of input
pulses for a specified time.
A) Setting
(1) Unit time setting
1) Set the unit time and the number of pulse per 1 revolution.

Setting value is saved at the following special K area and user can designate directly.

Device per each channel (Word) Setting


Class
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7 range
Unit time K322 K352 K382 K412 K2242 K2272 K2302 K2332 1~60000
Pulse/Rev
K323 K353 K383 K413 K2243 K2273 K2303 K2333 1~60000
value

2) In case of using Rev/unit time function, enable the following special K area
Device per each channel (Word)
Class Operation
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Rev/unit
0: disable
time K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905 K21805 K21905 K22005 K22105
1: enable
command

3) Rev/unit time value is saved at the following special K area.


Device per each channel (Word)
Class Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Rev/unit
K264 K274 K284 K294 K2184 K2194 K2204 K2214 -
time

8-36
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

B) Count function of Revolution/Unit time is used to count the number of pulses for a
specified time while auxiliary mode enable signal is On.
C) With the displayed number of pulses updated for a specified time and the number of
pulses per revolution input, Revolution/Unit time can be counted.
D) Number of Revolution per 1 second is indicated after number of pulse per 1 revolution is
set and time is set to 1 second (1000ms). In order to indicate by Revolutions per minute
(RPM), the operation is executed in program.
E) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to 1 and time is set to 1000 ms is
as shown below. (Ch0)

Command

1000
700
Count value

500 500

400
300 350
0

Revolution 100 300 200 150


per time
1000 1000 1000 1000

F) In order to indicate revolution per minute (RPM), the program is as shown below. In case
of DMUL operation, RPM value is saved 64 bit in D100~D103. If operated RPM value is
used, it can use to Word or Dword type according to system (case of RPM value is small
number).

8-37
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

G) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to 10 and time is set to 60,000 ms
is as shown below.

Command

1000
700
Count value

500 500

400
300 350
0

Revolution 10 30 20 15
per time
60000 60000 60000 60000

7) Count latch

When Count latch signal is On, present count value is latched.


Setting
If present counter value is to latch, Count Latch function is set Use.
Device area per channel
Class Operation
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Count latch 0: disable
K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906 K21806 K21906 K22006 K22106
command 1: enable

Count latch function is operated when Count latch signal is On. Namely, counter value is not
cleared when power supply Off =>On and mode change, it is counted from previous value.
In latch counter function, internal or external preset function has to use for clearing present
value.

8-38
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8) Preset function
It changes the current value into preset value.
There are two types of preset function, internal preset and external preset. External preset is fixed
as input contact point.

Preset setting value is saved at the following special K area.


Area per each channel (Double word)
Type Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Internal
K304 K334 K364 K394 K2224 K2254 K2284 K2314 -
preset value
External
K306 K336 K366 K396 K2226 K2256 K2286 K2316 -
preset value

Preset command is specified through the following special K area, external preset is used by
executing the designated input contact point after allowance bit is on.
Area per each channel (Bit)
Type Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3 Ch.4 Ch.5 Ch.6 Ch.7
Internal
preset K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901 K21801 K21901 K22001 K22101 -
command
External
preset K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902 K21802 K21902 K22002 K22102 -
allowance
External
preset P008 P009 P00A P00B P00C P00D P00E P00F -
command

8-39
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.2 Installation and Wiring

8.2.1 Precaution for wiring


Pay attention to the counteractions against wiring noise especially for High-speed pulse input.
1) Surely use twisted pair shielded cable, grounded with 3 class applied.
2) Keep away from power cable or I/O line which may cause noise.
3) Stabilized power should be used for filter.
Connect A-phase only for 1-phase input.
Connect A-phase and B-phase for 2-phase input.

8.2.2 Example of wiring


1) In case of pulse generator (encoder) is voltage output type

24V
Pulse Generator

CHSC

COM

24VG High-speed counter input

2) In case of pulse generator is open collector type

24V

Pulse Generator COM

High-speed counter input


24VG

8-40
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.3 Internal Memory

8.3.1 Special area for High-speed counter


Parameter and operation command area of built-in high-speed counter use a special K device.
If values set in parameter are changed, it works with the changed values. At the moment, makes sure
to use WRT command to save the changed value to flash. If not saved in flash, the changed values
with the power off => on and mode changed may not be maintained.
The following example shows that the internal preset values of CH1 set in parameter are changed by
program and saved in flash.
- Receiving an order command (M000), it moves (MOV) the new internal preset value (5000) to the
CH1 present area (K332).
- To save the changed settings into flash, it uses WRT command. At the moment, slot information is
set to 0 in case of built-in function.

Slot info Unused

0: High speed counter


1: determining a location
2: PID

8-41
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(1) S type
(a) Parameter setting

Description Device area per channel


Parameter Remark
Value Setting Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
h0000 Linear count
Counter
K300 K330 K360 K390 Word
mode h0001 Ring count

h0000 1 phase 1 input 1 multiplication


Pulse input h0001 1 phase 2 input 1 multiplication
K301 K331 K361 K391 Word
mode h0002 CW / CCW

h0003 2 phase 4 multiplication


h0000 (Magnitude) <
h0001 (Magnitude)
h0002 (Magnitude) =
Comp.
h0003 (Magnitude) K302 K332 K362 K392 Word
Output mode
h0004 (Magnitude) >
h0005 (Range) Include

h0006 (Range) Exclude

Internal
preset value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K304 K334 K364 K394 DWord
setting
External
preset value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K306 K336 K366 K396 DWord
setting

8-42
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Description Device area per channel


Parameter Remark
Value Setting Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Ring counter
Max. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K310 K340 K370 K400 DWord
setting
Comp. Output
Min. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K312 K342 K372 K402 DWord
setting
Comp. output
Max. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K314 K344 K374 K404 DWord
setting
HFFFF No use
h0000 P0020
h0001 P0021
Comp. output h0002 P0022
point h0003 P0023 K320 K350 K380 K410 Word
designation h0004 P0024
h0005 P0025
h0006 P0026
h0007 P0027

Unit time [ms] 1 ~ 60,000 K322 K352 K382 K412 DWord

1 ~ 60,000 DWord
Pulse/Rev.value K323 K353 K383 K413

8-43
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(b) Operation command

Device area per channel


Parameter
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Counter enabling K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900
Internal preset
K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901
designation of counter
External preset enabling
K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902
of counter
Designation of
K2603 K2703 K2803 K2903
decremental counter
Comp. output enabling K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904
Enabling of revolution
K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905
time per unit time
Designation of latch
K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906
counter
Carry signal (Bit) K2610 K2710 K2810 K2910
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K2911
Comp. output signal K2612 K2712 K2812 K2912

(c) Area of monitoring

Device area per channel


Parameter Remark
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Current counter value K262 K272 K282 K292 DWord
Revolution time per unit time K264 K274 K284 K294 DWord

8-44
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(2) H type
(a) Parameter setting

Description Device area per channel


Parameter Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Remark
Value Setting
Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7

Counter h0000 Linear count K300 K330 K360 K390


Word
mode h0001 Ring count K2220 K2250 K2280 K2310
h0000 1 phase 1 input 1 multiplication
Pulse input K301 K331 K361 K391 Word
h0001 1 phase 2 input 1 multiplication
mode
h0002 CW / CCW
setting K2221 K2251 K2281 K2311 Word
h0003 2 phase 4 multiplication
h0000 (Magnitude) <

h0001 (Magnitude)
Comp. K302 K332 K362 K392
h0002 (Magnitude) =
Output 0
h0003 (Magnitude) Word
mode
h0004 (Magnitude) >
setting
h0005 (Range) Include K2222 K2252 K2282 K2312
h0006 (Range) Exclude
h0000 (Magnitude) <
h0001 (Magnitude)
Comp. K303 K333 K363 K393
h0002 (Magnitude) =
Output 1
h0003 (Magnitude) Word
mode
h0004 (Magnitude) >
setting
h0005 (Range) Include K2223 K2253 K2283 K2313
h0006 (Range) Exclude
Internal K304 K334 K364 K394
preset value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 DWord
K2224 K2254 K2284 K2314
setting
External K306 K336 K366 K396
preset value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 DWord
K2226 K2256 K2286 K2316
setting

8-45
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Description Device area per channel


Parameter Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Remark
Value Setting
Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7
Ring counter K308 K338 K368 K398
min. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,645 DWord
K2228 K2258 K2288 K2318
setting
Ring counter K310 K340 K370 K400
max. value -2,147,483,646 2,147,483,647 DWord
K2230 K2260 K2290 K2320
setting
Comp. output K312 K342 K372 K402
min. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 DWord
K2232 K2262 K2292 K2322
setting
Comp. output K314 K344 K374 K404
max. value -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 DWord
K2234 K2264 K2294 K2324
setting
HFFFF No use
h0000 P0020
h0001 P0021
h0002 P0022
h0003 P0023 K320 K350 K380 K410
h0004 P0024
h0005 P0025
Comp. output 0 h0006 P0026
point h0007 P0027 Word
designation h0008 P0028
h0009 P0029
h000A P002A
h000B P002B
K2240 K2270 K2300 K2330
h000C P002C
h000D P002D
h000E P002E
h000F P002F

8-46
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

Description Device area per channel


Parameter Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Remark
Value Setting
Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7
HFFFF No use
h0000 P0020
h0001 P0021
h0002 P0022
h0003 P0023 K321 K351 K381 K411
h0004 P0024
h0005 P0025
Comp. output 1 h0006 P0026
point h0007 P0027 Word
designation h0008 P0028
h0009 P0029
h000A P002A
h000B P002B
K2241 K2271 K2301 K2331
h000C P002C
h000D P002D
h000E P002E
h000F P002F

K322 K352 K382 K412


Unit time [ms] 1 ~ 60,000 ms Word
K2242 K2272 K2302 K2332

K323 K353 K383 K413


Pulse/Rev.value 1 ~ 60,000 Word
K2243 K2273 K2303 K2333

8-47
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

(b) Operation command


Device area per channel
Parameter
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7
Counter enabling K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900 K21800 K21900 K22000 K22100
Internal preset designation
K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901 K21801 K21901 K22001 K22101
of counter
External preset enabling of
K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902 K21802 K21902 K22002 K22102
counter
Designation of decremental
K2603 K2703 K2803 K2903 K21803 K21903 K22003 K22103
counter

Comp. output 0 enabling K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904 K21804 K21904 K22004 K22104
Comp. output 1 enabling K2607 K2707 K2807 K2907 K21807 K21907 K22007 K22107
Enabling of revolution time
K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905 K21805 K21905 K22005 K22105
per unit time
Designation of latch
K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906 K21806 K21906 K22006 K22100
counter
Carry signal (Bit) K2610 K2710 K2810 K29100 K21810 K21910 K22010 K22110
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K29101 K21811 K21911 K22011 K22111
Comp. output 0 signal K2612 K2712 K2812 K29102 K21812 K21912 K22012 K22112
Comp. output 1 signal K2613 K2713 K2813 K29103 K21813 K21913 K22013 K22113

(c) Area of monitoring


Device area per channel
Parameter
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7

Current counter value K262 K272 K282 K292 K2182 K2192 K2202 K2212
Revolution per unit time K264 K274 K284 K294 K2184 K2194 K2204 K2214

8-48
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.3.2 Error code


It describes errors of the built-in high-speed counter.
Error occurred is saved in the following area.
Device area per channel
Category Remark
Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7
Error code K266 K276 K286 K296 K2186 K2196 K2206 K2216 Word

Error codes and descriptions


Error code
Description
(Decimal)
20 Counter type is set out of range
21 Pulse input type is set out of range
Requesting #1(3,)channel Run during the operation of #0(2) channel 2 phase(
22
* During #0(2) channel 2 phase inputting, using #1(3)channel is not possible.
23 Compared output type setting is set out of range.
25 Internal preset value is set out of counter range
26 External present value is set out of counter range
Ring counter setting is set out of range
27
* Note ring counter setting should be 2 and more.
28 Compared output min. value is set out of permissible max. input range
29 Compared output max. value is set out of permissible max. input range
30 Error of Compared output min. value>Compared output max. value
31 Compared output is set out of the default output value
34 Set value of Unit time is out of the range
35 Pulse value per 1 revolution is set out of range

Remark
If two and more errors occur, the module saves the latter error code and removes
the former one.

8-49
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

8.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter

It describes examples of using high-speed counter.


1) Setting high-speed counter parameter
How to set types of parameters to operate a high-speed counter is described as follows.
A) Set Internal Parameters in the basic project window.

B) Selecting high-speed counter opens a window to set high-speed counter parameters as follows.
For details regarding each parameter setting, refer to 8.1~8.3.
(Every parameter settings are saved in the special K device area.)

8-50
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

C) Turn ON the high-speed counter Enable signal (CH0:K2600) in the program.

D) To use additional functions of the high-speed counter, you needs to turn on the flag allowing
an operation command.
* Refer to 2. Operation Command, <8.3.1 Special K Area for High-speed Counter>
For instance, turn on 2605 bit if among additional functions, rotation number function is used.

E) Upon the setting, download program and parameter to PLC.

8-51
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

2) Monitoring and setting command


Monitoring and command setting of high-speed counter are described as follows.
A) If starting a monitor and clicking a Special Module Monitor, the following window is opened.

8-52
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

B) Clicking Monitor shows monitor and test window of high-speed counter.

Item Description
FLAG Monitor Show flag monitoring and command window of high-speed counter
Start Monitoring Start monitoring each item (special K device area monitor).
Write each item setting to PLC.
Test
(Write the setting to special K device)
Close Close monitor

8-53
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

C) Clicking Start Monitoringshows the high-speed counter monitor display, in which you
may set each parameter. At this moment, if any, changed values are not saved if power off=>
on or mode is changed.

D) ClickingFLAG Monitor shows the monitor of each flag in high-speed counter, in which
you may direct operation commands by flags (clicking commands reverse turn).

8-54
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.1 Safety Instruction

Danger
 Please design protection circuit at the external of PLC for entire system to operate safely because an
abnormal output or an malfunction may cause accident when any error of external power or malfunction
of PLC module.
(1) It should be installed at the external side of PLC to emergency stop circuit, protection circuit,
interlock circuit of opposition action such as forward /reverse operation and interlock circuit for
protecting machine damage such as upper/lower limit of positioning.
(2) If PLC detects the following error, all operation stops and all output is off.
(Available to hold output according to parameter setting)
(a) When over current protection equipment or over voltage protection operates
(b) When self diagnosis function error such as WDT error in PLC CPU occurs
 In case of error about IO control part that is not detected by PLC CPU, all output is off.
Design Fail Safe circuit at the external of PLC for machine to operate safely. Refer to 10.2 Fail Safe
circuit.
(1) Because of error of output device, Relay, TR, etc., output may not be normal. About output signal that
may cause the heavy accident, design supervisory circuit to external.
In case load current more than rating or over current by load short flows continuously, danger of heat, fire
may occur so design safety circuit to external such as fuse.
Design for external power supply to be done first after PLC power supply is done. If external power
supply is done first, it may cause accident by misoutput, misoperation.
In case communication error occurs, for operation status of each station, refer to each communication
manual.
In case of controlling the PLC while peripheral is connected to CPU module, configure the interlock circuit
for system to operate safely. During operation, in case of executing program change, operation status
change, familiarize the manual and check the safety status. Especially, in case of controlling long
distance PLC, user may not response to error of PLC promptly because of communication error or etc.
Limit how to take action in case of data communication error between PLC CPU and external device
adding installing interlock circuit at the PLC program.

9 1
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

Danger

Dont close the control line or communication cable to main circuit or power line. Distance should be more
than 100mm. It may cause malfunction by noise.

In case of controlling lamp load, heater, solenoid valve, etc. in case of Off -> On, large current (10 times of
normal current) may flows, so consider changing the module to module that has margin at rated current.

Process output may not work properly according to difference of delay of PLC main power and external
power for process (especially DC in case of PLC power On-Off and of start time.
For example, in case of turning on PLC main power after supplying external power for process, DC output
module may malfunction when PLC is on, so configure the circuit to turn on the PLC main power first
Or in case of external power error or PLC error, it may cause the malfunction.

Not to lead above error to entire system, part causing breakdown of machine or accident should be
configured at the external of PLC

9 2
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.1.1 Fail safe circuit

(1) example of system design (In case of not using ERR contact point of power module)

In case of AC In case of AC . DC
Power

Power

Check direct Trans Trans


Trans current
Fuse Fuse
Fuse Signal input

F0045 DC power

F0045
(2) ( ERR ) Pm
Pm Fuse
F009C
F009C Pm Timer setting
Pm which DC input
Start
PLC RUN output Pm
switch Program
Start available as Tm signal is
RA1 configured.

Stop
SW Input module
Start Program
switch

Output for warning


Pm
(Lamp or buzzer)
P080 0.5 module
Output On/Off Stop . Voltage relay
SW
equipped
Pn RUN by F009C
(5)
PLC
Power 55
off to output .
Pm

device ()
(a) PLC
Emergency stop,
Output module Output module Output for warning
Stop by limit (Lamp or buzzer)

Run by F009C
Configure part that
lead opposite operation
or breakdown such as Output module
interlock circuit
forward, reverse
revolution by external Power Off to
interlock circuit output device
(Emergency
stop,
Start sequence of power stop by limit
In case of AC switch)
(1) Turn on power
(2) Run CPU.
(3) Turn on start switch
(4) Output device runs by program through Start sequence of power
magnetic contactor (MC) [On] In case of AC DC
Run CPU after power is on
(1) Turn on RA2 as DC power on
(2) Turn on timer after DC power is stable.
(3) Turn on start switch
(4) Output device runs by program through
magnetic contactor (MC) [On]

9 3
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(2) System design circuit example (In case of using ERR contact point of power module)
Power

Checking DC Trans Trans


Fuse Fuse
current
Signal input
F0045 DC power

Pm
Start stop circuit F009C Fuse

Pm Timer setting
PLC RUN output Pm which DC input
Available to start as Tm signal is
RA1 Tm configured.

Start Program
SW

Stop SW Voltage relay


equipped
Pm

Output module Output for warning


(Lamp or buzzer)
Pm

Pn

Stop by ERR
ERR
RA3
Error Off

Output module

Configure part that ERR contact point off


lead opposite operation to output device
or breakdown such as power off
interlock circuit
forward, reverse (Emergency stop,
revolution by external stop by limit)
interlock circuit

Start sequence of power


In case of AC DC
(1) Run CPU after turning on power.
(2) Turn on RA2 with DC power supplied
(3) Turn on timer after DC power is stable
(4) Turn on start switch Output device runs by program through magnetic
contactor (MC) [On]

9 4
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(3) Fail safe countermeasure in case of PLC error


Error of PLC CPU and memory is detected by self diagnosis but in case error occurs in IO control part, etc., CPU
can detect the error. At this case, though it is different according to status of error, all contact point is on or off, so
safety may not be guaranteed. Though we do out best to our quality as producer, configure safety circuit
preparing that error occurs in PLC and it lead to breakdown or accident.

System example

Input Input Input Input Output Output


Main
16 16 16 16 16 16
unit
point point point point point point

Output module for fail safe

Equip output module for fail safe to last slot of system.

[Fail safe circuit example]


On delay timer
T1
P80
F0093 Off delay timer
P80 T2
External load MC
P81 L
~
P8F L
P80
24V

- +
0.5s 0.5s 0V
DC24
T1 T2
CPU unit MC
Output module
Since P80 turn on/off every 0.5s, use TR output.

9 5
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.1.2 PLC heat calculation

(1) Power consumption of each part

(a) Power consumption of module


The power conversion efficiency of power module is about 70% and the other 30% is gone with
heat; 3/7 of the output power is the pure power consumption. Therefore, the calculation is as follows.
Wpw = 3/7 {(I5V X 5) + (I24V X 24)} (W)
I5V : power consumption of each module DC5V circuit(internal current consumption)
I24V: the average current consumption of DC24V used for output module
(current consumption of simultaneous On point)
If DC24V is externally supplied or a power module without DC24V is used, it is not applicable.

(b) Sum of DC5V circuit current consumption


The DC5V output circuit power of the power module is the sum of power consumption used by each
module.
W5V = I5V X 5 (W)

(c) DC24V average power consumption(power consumption of simultaneous On point)


The DC24V output circuits average power of the power module is the sum of power consumption
used by each module.
W24V = I24V X 24 (W)

(d) Average power consumption by output voltage drop of the output module(power consumption of
simultaneous On point)
Wout = Iout X Vdrop X output point X simultaneous On rate (W)
Iout : output current (actually used current) (A)
Vdrop: voltage drop of each output module (V)

I24V

DC24V

AC power Main unit Comm. Comm. output input Special input


100V~240V I5V
constant DC5V

Voltage

transformer Iout Iin

load
AC power
DC 100V~240V
power
24V

9 6
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(e) Input average power consumption of input module


(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
Win = lin X E X input point X simultaneous On rate (W)
Iin: input current (root mean square value in case of AC) (A)
E : input voltage (actually used voltage) (V)

(f) Power consumption of special module power assembly


WS = I5V X 5 + I24V X 24 + I100V X 100 (W)
The sum of power consumption calculated by each block is the power consumption of the entire
PLC system.
W = WPW + W5V + W24V + Wout + Win + Ws (W)
Calculate the heats according to the entire power consumption(W) and review the temperature
increase within the control panel.

The calculation of temperature rise within the control panel is displayed as follows.
T = W / UA [C]
W : power consumption of the entire PLC system (the above calculated value)
A : surface area of control panel [m2]
U : if equalizing the temperature of the control panel by using a fan and others - - - 6
If the air inside the panel is not ventilated - - - - - - - - - - 4

If installing the PLC in an air-tight control panel, it needs heat-protective(control) design considering the
heat from the PLC as well as other devices. If ventilating by vent or fan, inflow of dust or gas may affect
the performance of the PLC system.

9 7
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules

9.2.1 Attachment/Detachment of modules

Caution in handling
Use PLC in the range of general specification specified by manual.
In case of using out of range, it may cause electric shock, fire, malfunction, damage of product.

Warning
 Module must be mounted to hook for fixation properly before its fixation. The module may be damaged
from over-applied force. If module is not mounted properly, it may cause malfunction.

 Do not drop or impact the module case, terminal block connector.

 Do not separate the PCB from case.

(1) Equipment of module

Eliminate the extension cover at the upper of module.


Push the module and connect it in agreement with hook for fixation of four edges and hook for
connection at the bottom.
After connection, get down the hook for fixation at the upper part and lower part and fix it completely.

Module fixation (Hook)

9 8
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(2) Detachment of module

Get up the hook for fixation of upper part and lower part and disconnect it.

Detach the module with two hands. (Dont force over-applied force.)

Hook for module fixation

Caution
 When separating module, dont force over-applied power. If so, hook may be damaged.

9 9
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(3) Installation of module


XGB PLC main unit and expansion unit are having the hook for DIN rail (rail width 35mm).
So they can be installed at DIN rail.

(a) In case of installing at DIN rail


Pull out the hook for DIN rail in the bottom of module and install the module at DIN rail.
After installing the module at DIN rail, push the hook and fix the module at DIN rail.

Hook for DIN rail

(b) In case of installing at the panel


You can install the XGB compact type main unit at the panel directly by using screw hole.
When installing the product at the panel directly, use M4 type screw

Panel

Hole for installation

9 10
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(4) Module equipment location


Keep the following distance between module and structure or part for well ventilation and easy detachment
and attachment.

*1
30 or above

Panel
PLC

20 or above*3

*1
30 or above

5 or above*1 5 or above

*1 : In case height of wiring duct is less than 50 mm (except this 40mm or above)
*2 : In case of equipping cable without removing near module, 20mm or above
*3 : In case of connector type, 80mm or above

(5) Module equipment direction


(a) For easy ventilation, install like the following figure.

9 11
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(b) Dont install like the following figure

(6) Distance with other device

To avoid radiation noise or heat, keep the distance between PLC and device (connector and relay) as far as the
following figure.
Device installed in front of PLC: 100 or above
Device installed beside PLC: 50 or above

100mm or above

50mm or above

50mm or above

9 12
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.2.2 Caution in handling

Here describes caution from open to install


Dont drop or impact product.
Dont disassemble the PCB from case. It may cause the error.
In case of wiring, make sure foreign substance not to enter upper part of module. If it enters, eliminate it.

(1) Caution in handling IO module


It describes caution in handling IO module.

(a) Recheck of IO module specification


For input module, be cautious about input voltage, for output module, if voltage that exceeds the max.
open/close voltage is induced, it may cause the malfunction, breakdown or fire.

(b) Used wire


When selecting wire, consider ambient temp, allowed current and minimum size of wire is
AWG22(0.3mm2) or above.

(c) Environment
In case of wiring IO module, if device or material that induce high heat is too close or oil contacts wire
too long time, it may cause short, malfunction or error.

(d) Polarity
Before supplying power of module which has terminal block, check the polarity.

(e) Wiring
In case of wiring IO with high voltage line or power line, induced obstacle may cause error.
Let no cable pass the IO operation indication part (LED).
(You cant discriminate the IO indication.)
In case induced load is connected with output module, connect the surge killer or diode load to load
in parallel. Connect cathode of diode to + side of power.

Induced load
OUT

Output module
Surge killer
COM

OUT Induced load

+
Output module
-
Diode
COM

(f) Terminal block


Check close adhesion status. Let no foreign material of wire enter into PLC when wring terminal block
or processing screw hole. At this case, it may cause malfunction.

(g) Dont impact to IO module or dont disassemble the PCB from case.

9 13
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.3 Wire

In case using system, it describes caution about wiring.

Danger
When wiring, cut off the external power.
If all power is cut, it may cause electric shock or damage of product.
In case of flowing electric or testing after wiring, equip terminal cover included in product. It not, it may cause
electric shock.

Caution
 Do D type ground (type 3 ground) or above dedicated for PLC for FG and LG terminal. It may cause electric
shock or malfunction.
 When wiring module, check the rated voltage and terminal array and do properly.
If rating is different, it may cause fire, malfunction.
 For external connecting connector, use designated device and solder.
If connecting is not safe, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
For screwing, use designated torque range. If it is not fit, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
Let no foreign material enter such as garbage or disconnection part into module. It may cause fire, malfunction,
error.

9.3.1Power wiring

(1) In case voltage regulation is larger than specified, connect constant voltage transformer.

BA BA
In:24V D C , 7m A 20 20
19 19
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 18 18
17 17
16 16
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 15 15
XBC- DR64H IN 14 14
13 13
PWR 12 12
O UT 11 11
RUN 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F RS-232C
10 10
ERR 09 09
08 08

AC power
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
07 07
1 85VA 50/60H z 06 06
05 05
04 04

100V~240V
03 03
02 02
01 01

AC power AC100-240V
Constant
voltage
transformer

(2) Connect noise that include small noise between line and earth.
(When there are many noise, connect insulated transformer.)

9 14
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(3) Isolate the PLC power, I/O devices and power devices as follows.

Main unit
Main PLC
power power Constant
AC220V Voltage
Transformer AC100-240V

IO power

Main circuit device

(4) If using DC24V of the power module

(a) Do not connect DC24V of several power modules in parallel. It may cause the destruction of a module.
(b) If a power module can not meet the DC24V output capacity, supply DC24V externally as presented
below.

24V 24V I
I
O
CPU CPU
O

DC 24V
24V
I
CPU Power
O
Supply

(5) AC110V/AC220V/DC24V cables should be compactly twisted and connected in the shortest distance.

(6) AC110V/AC220V cable should be as thick as possible(2mm2) to reduce voltage drop.

(7) AC110V/ DC24V cables should not be installed close to main circuit cable(high voltage/high current) and I/O
signal cable. They should be 100mm away from such cables

9 15
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

(8) To prevent surge from lightning, use the lightning surge absorber as presented below.

PLC
I/O device

E1 E2

Surge absorber to prevent

Note
(1) Isolate the grounding(E1) of lightning surge absorber from the grounding(E2) of the PLC.
(2) Select a lightning surge absorber type so that the max. voltage may not the specified
allowable voltage of the absorber.

(9) When noise may be intruded inside it, use an insulated shielding transformer or noise filter.

(10) Wiring of each input power should be twisted as short as possible and the wiring of shielding transformer or
noise filter should not be arranged via a duct.

9 16
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.3.2 I/O Device wiring

(1) The size of I/O device cable is limited to 0.3~2 mm2 but it is recommended to select a size(0.3 mm2) to use
conveniently.

(2) Please isolate input signal line from output signal line.

(3) I/O signal lines should be wired 100mm and more away from high voltage/high current main circuit cable.

(4) Batch shield cable should be used and the PLC side should be grounded unless the main circuit cable and
power cable can not be isolated.

PLC Shield cable

input
RA

output
DC

(5) When applying pipe-wiring, make sure to firmly ground the piping.

9.3.3 Grounding wiring

(1) The PLC contains a proper noise measure, so it can be used without any separate grounding if there is a
large noise. However, if grounding is required, please refer to the followings.

(2) For grounding, please make sure to use the exclusive grounding.
For grounding construction, apply type 3 grounding(grounding resistance lower than 100 )

(3) If the exclusive grounding is not possible, use the common grounding as presented in B) of the figure below.

PLC Other devices PLC Other devices PLC Other devices

Type 3 Grounding Type 3 Grounding

A) Exclusive grounding : best B) common grounding : good C) common grounding: defective

(4) Use the grounding cable more than 2 mm2. To shorten the length of the grounding cable, place the grounding
point as close to the PLC as possible.

(5) If any malfunction from grounding is detected, separate the FG of the base from the grounding.

9 17
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring

9.3.4 Specifications of wiring cable

The specifications of cable used for wiring are as follows.

Types of external Cable specification (mm2)


connection Lower limit Upper limit
Digital input 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Digital output 0.18 (AWG24) 2.0 (AWG14)
Analogue I/O 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Communication 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Main power 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)
Protective grounding 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)

9 18
Chapter 10 Maintenance

Chapter 10 Maintenance
Be sure to perform daily and periodic maintenance and inspection in order to maintain the PLC in the best
conditions.

10.1 Maintenance and Inspection


The I/O module mainly consist of semiconductor devices and its service life is semi-permanent. However,
periodic inspection is requested for ambient environment may cause damage to the devices. When inspecting
one or two times per six months, check the following items.

Check Items Judgment Corrective Actions


Within change rate of input
Change rate of input voltage voltage Hold it with the allowable range.
(Less than 15% to +20% )
Input/Output specification of
Power supply for input/output Hold it with the allowable range of each module.
each module

0 ~ + 55 Adjust the operating temperature and humidity with the


Temperature
Ambient defined range.
Humidity 5 ~ 95%RH
environment
Vibration Use vibration resisting rubber or the vibration prevention
No vibration
method.
Play of modules No play allowed Securely enrage the hook.
Connecting conditions of
No loose allowed Retighten terminal screws.
terminal screws
Check the number of
Spare parts Spare parts and their Cover the shortage and improve the conditions.
Store conditions

10.2 Daily Inspection


The following table shows the inspection and items which are to be checked daily.
Corrective
Check Items Check Points Judgment
Actions
Connection conditions of Retighten
Check the screws. Screws should not be loose.
base Screws.
Connection conditions of Check the connecting screws Retighten
Screws should not be loose.
Input/Output module Check module cover. Screws.
Check for loose mounting screws. Retighten
Screws should not be loose.
Connecting conditions of Screws.
terminal block or extension Check the distance between solderless
Proper clearance should be provided. Correct.
terminals.
cable
Connecting of expansion cable. Connector should not be loose. Correct.
PWR LED Check that the LED is On. On(Off indicates an error) See chapter 5.

Run LED Check that the LED is On during Run. On (flickering indicates an error) See chapter 5.

LED ERR LED Check that the LED is Off during Run. Off(On indicates an error) See chapter 5.
indicator On when input is On,
Input LED Check that the LED turns On and Off. See chapter 5.
Off when input is off.
On when output is On,
Output LED Check that the LED turns On and Off See chapter 5.
Off when output is off

101
Chapter 10 Maintenance

10.3 Periodic Inspection


Check the following items once or twice every six months, and perform the needed corrective actions.

Corrective
Check Items Checking Methods Judgment
Actions
Ambient
0 ~ 55 C Adjust to general
temperature -. Measure with thermometer
Ambient standard
Ambient Humidity and hygrometer 5 ~ 95%RH (Internal environmental
environment
-. measure corrosive gas There should be no standard of control
Ambient pollution
section)
level corrosive gases
Looseness, The module should be move The module should be
PLC Ingress the unit mounted securely.
Retighten screws
Conditions dust or foreign
Visual check No dust or foreign material
material
Loose terminal
Re-tighten screws Screws should not be loose Retighten
screws
Distance between
Connecting Visual check Proper clearance Correct
terminals
conditions
Retighten connector
Connectors should not be
Loose connectors Visual check mounting
loose.
screws
Measure voltage between
Line voltage check DC24V: DC20.4 ~ 28.8V Change supply power
input terminals

102
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
The following explains contents, diagnosis and corrective actions for various errors that can occur during system
operation.

11.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting


System reliability not only depends on reliable equipment but also on short downtimes in the event of fault. The
short discovery and corrective action is needed for speedy operation of system. The following shows the basic
instructions for troubleshooting.

1) Visual checks
Check the following points.
Machine operating condition (in stop and operation status)
Power On/Off
Status of I/O devices
Condition of wiring (I/O wires, extension and communications cables)
Display states of various indicators (such as POWER LED, RUN LED, ERR LED and I/O LED)
After checking them, connect peripheral devices and check the operation status of the PLC and the
program contents.
2) Trouble Check
Observe any change in the error conditions during the following.
Switch to the STOP position, and then turn the power on and off.
3) Narrow down the possible causes of the trouble where the fault lies, i.e.:
Inside or outside of the PLC ?
I/O module or another module?
PLC program?

11.2 Troubleshooting
This section explains the procedure for determining the cause of troubles as well as the errors and corrective
actions.

Symptoms

Is the power LED turned Flowchart used when the POWER LED is turned Off.
Off ?

Is the ERR LED flickering ? Flowchart used when the ERR LED is flickering.

Are the RUN LED turned Flowchart used when the RUN turned Off.
Off ?

I/O module doesnt operate Flowchart used when the output load of the output module
properly. doesnt turn on.

Program cannot be written. Flowchart used when a program cant be written to the
PLC.

11-1
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the PWR (Power) LED turns Off.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the power is supplied or the power LED
turns Off during operation.

Power LED is turned Off.

Is the power supply No


operating? Supply the power.

No Yes
Yes Does the power LED
turns On?

No
Is the voltage within the Supply the power
rated power? properly.

Yes

Yes Yes
Does the power LED
turns On?

Over current protection


device activated?

1) Eliminate the excess current


2) Switch the input power Off then
On.

No

No Yes
Does the power LED
turns On?

Write down the troubleshooting


Questionnaire and contact
the nearest service center.

Complete

11-2
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.2 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the ERR (Error) LED is flickering
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure use when the power is supplied star
ts or the ERR LED is flickering during operation.

STOP LED goes flickering

Check the error code, with


connected XG5000.

No
See Appendix 1 Flag list
Warning error?
and remove the cause of
the error.

Yes

No
Is ERR LED still
flicking ?

Complete
Yes

Write down the Troubleshooting


Questionnaires and contact the nearest
service center.

Warning
Though warning error appears, PLC system doesnt stop but corrective action is needed
promptly. If not, it may cause the system failure.

11-3
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.3 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the RUN , STOP LED turns Off.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure to treat the lights-out of RUN LED when the power
is supplied, operation starts or operation is in the process.

RUN, STOP LED is Off.

Turn the power unit Off and On.

No
Is RUN/ STOP LED Off?

Yes

Write down the Troubleshooting


Questionnaires and contact the nearest Complete
service center.

11-4
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.2.4 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the I/O part doesnt operate normally.

The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the I/O module doesnt
operate normally.

When the I/O module doesnt work normally.

No
I\s the output LED of SOL1
On?

Yes

Measure the voltage of terminal Correct wiring. Replace the connector of Check the status of SOL1 by
in SOL1 by Tester. the terminal block.
XG5000.

No No
No
Yes Is the Yes Is it normal condition?
Is the measured value Is the output
terminal connector
normal? wiring correct? appropriate?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Separate the external
wiring than check the
condition of output module.
Continue

Yes No
Is it normal condition?

Check the status of SOL1. Replace the Unit

11-5
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Continue

No
Are the indicator LED of the
switch 1 and 2 on?

Yes

Check voltage of switch 1,2 Check voltage of switch 1,2


by tester by tester

Is the
Yes
Is the measured value Is the measured value terminal screw tighten
normal? normal? securely?
No No
Yes No Yes

Yes Is the condition


Is input wiring correct? of the terminal board connector
appropriate?

Separate the external No No


wiring witch then check
the status by forced input

Correct wiring Retighten the terminal Replace the terminal


Is the measured value screw. board connector.
normal?
No
Yes

Input unit replacement Check the status of the switch 1 Input unit replacement is
is Needed. and 2. Check from the beginning. Needed.

11-6
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.3 Troubleshooting Questionnaire

When problems have been met during operation of the XGC series, please write down this Questionnaires and
contact the service center via telephone or facsimile.
y For errors relating to special or communication modules, use the questionnaire included in the Users manual
of the unit.

1. Telephone & FAX No


Tell) FAX)
2. Using equipment model:

3. Details of using equipment


CPU model: ( ) OS version No.:( ) Serial No.( )
XG5000 (for program compile) version No.: ( )

4.General description of the device or system used as the control object:

5. The kind of the base unit:


Operation by the mode setting switch ( ),
Operation by the XG5000 or communications ( ),
External memory module operation ( ),

6. Is the ERR. LED of the CPU module turned On ? Yes( ), No( )

7. XG5000 error message:

8. History of corrective actions for the error message in the article 7:

9. Other tried corrective actions:

10. Characteristics of the error


y Repetitive( ): Periodic( ), Related to a particular sequence( ), Related to environment( )
y Sometimes( ): General error interval:

11. Detailed Description of error contents:

12. Configuration diagram for the applied system:

11-7
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.4 Troubleshooting Examples


Possible troubles with various circuits and their corrective actions are explained.

11.4.1 Input circuit troubles and corrective actions


The followings describe possible troubles with input circuits, as well as corrective actions.

Condition Cause Corrective Actions


Leakage current of external device
(Such as a drive by non-contact switch) y Connect an appropriate register and
Input signal capacity, which will make the voltage lower
doesnt turn AC input across the terminals of the input module.
off. C Leakage current
AC input
R
C
~
External device R
~
Leakage current of external device
Input signal (Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp) y CR values are determined by the leakage
doesnt turn current value.
off. AC input
Recommended value C : 0.1 ~ 0.47
C Leakage current
(Neon lamp R: 47 ~ 120 (1/2W)
R
may be still Or make up another independent display
~ circuit.
External device
on)
Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring
Input signal cable. y Locate the power supply on the external
doesnt turn device side as shown below.
off. AC input AC input
Leakage current

~ ~
External device External device

Input signal Leakage current of external device (Drive by y Connect an appropriate register, which will make
doesnt turn switch with LED indicator) the voltage higher than the OFF voltage across the
off.
input module terminal and common terminal.
DC input
DC input
Leakage current
R R

External device

Input signal y Sneak current due to the use of two y Use only one power supply.
y Connect a sneak current prevention diode.
doesnt turn different power supplies.
off.
DC input
DC input
E E1
L L
E E

y E1 > E2, sneaked.

11-8
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.4.2 Output circuit and corrective actions


The following describes possible troubles with output circuits, as well as their corrective actions.
Condition Cause Corrective Action

When the output yLoad is half-wave rectified inside (in some y Connect registers of tens to hundreds K
is off, excessive cases, it is true of a solenoid) across the load in parallel.
voltage is yWhen the polarity of the power supply is as
applied to the shown in , C is charged. When the polarity is R

load. as shown in , the voltage charged in C plus


D
the line voltage are applied across D. Max.
voltage is approx. 22. C
R ~
Load

C D
~
R Load

*) If a resistor is used in this way, it does not


pose a problem to the output element. But it may
make the performance of the diode (D), which is
built in the load, drop to cause problems.
The load y Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, y Connect C and R across the load, which are of
doesnt which is connected to output element in parallel. registers of tens K. When the wiring distance
turn off. from the output module to the load is long, there
Output
Load may be a leakage current due to the line
C capacity. C
R Leakage current ~ R R

Load Load

When the load y Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, y Drive the relay using a contact and drive the
is C-R type which is connected to output element in parallel. C-R type timer using the since contact.
timer, time y Use other timer than the CR contact some
Output
constant timers have half-ware rectified internal circuits
Load
fluctuates. C therefore, be cautious. Timer
~ T
R Leakage current

Output X
~

The load does y Sneak current due to the use of two different y Use only one power supply.
not turn off. power supplies. y Connect a sneak current prevention diode.

Output Output

Load
Load
E1 E
E2 E

If the load is the relay, etc, connect a


E1<E2, sneaks. E1 is off (E2 is on), sneaks. counter-electromotive voltage absorbing code as
shown by the dot line.

11-9
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Output circuit troubles and corrective actions (continued).

Condition Cause Corrective actions


The load off y Over current at off state [The large y Insert a small L/R magnetic contact and
response solenoid current fluidic load (L/R is large) drive the load using the same contact.
time is long. such as is directly driven with the transistor
output. Outpu

Outpu
Off current
Loa
Loa
E

y The off response time can be delayed by


one or more second as some loads make
the current flow across the diode at the off
time of the transistor output.
Output Surge current of the white lamp y To suppress the surge current make the
transistor is dark current of 1/3 to 1/5 rated current flow.
destroyed. Output Output

E1 R E

A surge current of 10 times or more when Sink type transistor output

turned on.
Output

Source type transistor


output

11-10
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

11.5 Error Code List


Error Action Operation LED Diagnosis
Error cause
code (restart mode after taking an action) status status point
Program to execute is 0.5 second RUN
23 Start after reloading the program Warning
abnormal Flicker mode
Start after reloading I/O parameter,
Reset
Battery change if battery has a problem.
0.5 second RUN
24 I/O parameter error Check the preservation status after I/O Warning
Flicker mode
parameter reloading and if error occurs,
switching
change the unit.
Start after reloading Basic parameter,
Reset
Change battery if it has a problem.
0.5 second RUN
25 Basic parameter error Check the preservation status after Basic Warning
Flicker mode
parameter reloading and if error occurs,
switching
change the unit.
Module set in
RUN
parameter and the modify the module or parameter and then 0.5 second
30 Warning mode
installed module does restart. Flicker
switching
not match
Module falling during After checking the position of
0.1 second Every
31 operation or additional attachment/detachment of expansion module Warning
Flicker scan
setup during Run mode
Data of I/O module
After checking the position of slot where the
does not access Heavy 0.1 second
33 access error occurs by XG5000, change the Scan end
normally during error Flicker
module and restart (acc.to parameter.)
operation.
Normal access of
After checking the position of slot that access
special/link module Heavy 0.1 second
34 error occurred by XG5000, change the Scan end
data during operation error Flicker
module and restart (acc.to parameter).
not available
Abnormal system end by noise or hard ware
error.
Abnormal stop of Heavy 0.1 second Ordinary
39 1) If it occurs repeatedly when power
CPU or malfunction error Flicker time
reinput, request service center
2) Noise measures
Scan time of program
during operation While
After checking the scan watchdog time
exceeds the scan 0.5 second running
40 designated by parameter, modify the Warning
watchdog time Flicker the
parameter or the program and then restart.
designated by program
parameter.
Operation error While
Remove operation error reload the
occurs while 0.5 second running
41 program and restart. Warning
running the user Flicker the
program. program
Timer index user After reloading a timer index program 0.5 second
44 Warning Scan end
error modification, start Flicker
Refer to Heavy error detection flag and
Heavy error of Heavy 1 second
50 modifies the device and restart. (Acc. Scan end
external device error Flicker
Parameter)
While
E_STOP function After removing error causes which starts Heavy 1 second running
60
executed E_STOP function in program, power reinput error Flicker the
program

11-11
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Error Action Operation LED Diagnosis


Error cause
code (restart mode after taking an action) status status point
Data memory backup If not error in battery, power reinput 1 second
500 Warning Reset
not possible Remote mode is switched to STOP mode. Flicker
Setting the time by XG5000 if there is no 0.1 second Ordinary
501 Abnormal clock data Warning
error Flicker time
0.1 second Ordinary
502 Battery voltage falling Battery change at power On status Warning
Flicker time

11-12
Appendix 1 Flag List

Appendix 1 Flag List

Appendix 1.1 Special Relay (F) List

Word Bit Variables Function Description


- _SYS_STATE Mode and state Indicates PLC mode and operation State.
F0000 _RUN Run Run state.
F0001 _STOP Stop Stop state.
F0002 _ERROR Error Error state.
F0003 _DEBUG Debug Debug state.
F0004 _LOCAL_CON Local control Local control mode.
F0006 _REMOTE_CON Remote mode Remote control mode.
F0008 _RUN_EDIT_ST Editing during RUN Editing program download during RUN.
F0009 _RUN_EDIT_CHK Editing during RUN Internal edit processing during RUN.
F000A _RUN_EDIT_DONE Edit done during RUN Edit is done during RUN.
F000B _RUN_EDIT_END Edit end during RUN Edit is ended during RUN.
F000C _CMOD_KEY Operation mode Operation mode changed by key.
F000D _CMOD_LPADT Operation mode Operation mode changed by local PADT.
F000~1
F000E _CMOD_RPADT Operation mode Operation mode changed by Remote PADT.
Operation mode changed by Remote
F000F _CMOD_RLINK Operation mode
communication module.
F0010 _FORCE_IN Forced input Forced input state.
F0011 _FORCE_OUT Forced output Forced output state.
F0014 _MON_On Monitor Monitor on execution.
F0015 _USTOP_On Stop Stop by Stop function.
F0016 _ESTOP_On EStop Stop by EStop function.
F0017 _CONPILE_MODE Compile Compile on execution.
F0018 _INIT_RUN Initialize Initialization task on execution.
F001C _PB1 Program Code 1 Program Code 1 selected.
F001D _PB2 Program Code 2 Program Code 2 selected.
F001E _CB1 Compile Code 1 Compile Code 1 selected.
F001F _CB2 Compile Code2 Compile Code 2 selected.
- _CNF_ER System error Reports heavy error state of system.
F0021 _IO_TYER Module Type error Module Type does not match.
Module detachment
F0022 _IO_DEER Module is detached.
error
F002~3
F0024 _IO_RWER Module I/O error Module I/O error.

F0025 _IP_IFER Module interface error Special/communication module interface error.


Detected heavy error in external
F0026 _ANNUM_ER External device error
Device.

App. 1-1
Appendix 1 Flag List

Word Bit Variable Function Description


F0028 _BPRM_ER Basic parameter Basic parameter error.
F0029 _IOPRM_ER IO parameter I/O configuration parameter error.
Special module parameter is
F002A _SPPRM_ER Special module parameter
Abnormal.
Communication module Communication module parameter
F002~3 F002B _CPPRM_ER
parameter is abnormal.
F002C _PGM_ER Program error Program error.
F002D _CODE_ER Code error Program Code error.
F002E _SWDT_ER System watchdog System watchdog operated.
F0030 _WDT_ER Scan watchdog Scan watchdog operated.
- _CNF_WAR System warning Reports light error state of system.
F0041 _DBCK_ER Backup error Data backup error.
F0043 _ABSD_ER Operation shutdown error Stop by abnormal operation.
F0046 _ANNUM_WAR External device error Detected light error of external device.
F0048 _HS_WAR1 High speed link 1 High speed link parameter 1 error.
F004
F0049 _HS_WAR2 High speed link 2 High speed link parameter 2 error.
F0054 _P2P_WAR1 P2P parameter 1 P2P parameter 1 error.
F0055 _P2P_WAR2 P2P parameter 2 P2P parameter 2 error.
F0056 _P2P_WAR3 P2P parameter 3 P2P parameter 3 error.
F005C _CONSTANT_ER Constant error Constant error.
- _USER_F User contact Timer used by user.
F0090 _T20MS 20ms 20ms cycle Clock.
F0091 _T100MS 100ms 100ms cycle Clock.
F0092 _T200MS 200ms 200ms cycle Clock.
F0093 _T1S 1s Clock 1s cycle Clock.
F0094 _T2S 2 s Clock 2s cycle Clock.
F0095 _T10S 10 s Clock 10s cycle Clock.
F009
F0096 _T20S 20 s Clock 20s cycle Clock.
F0097 _T60S 60 s Clock 60s cycle Clock.
F0099 _On Ordinary time On Always On state Bit.
F009A _Off Ordinary time Off Always Off state Bit.
F009B _1On 1scan On First scan On Bit.
F009C _1Off 1scan Off First scan OFF bit.
F009D _STOG Reversal Reversal every scan.

App. 1-2
Appendix 1 Flag List

Word Bit Variable Function Description


- _USER_CLK User Clock Clock available for user setting.
F0100 _USR_CLK0 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 0.
F0101 _USR_CLK1 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 1.
F0102 _USR_CLK2 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 2.
F010 F0103 _USR_CLK3 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 3.
F0104 _USR_CLK4 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 4.
F0105 _USR_CLK5 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 5.
F0106 _USR_CLK6 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 6.
F0107 _USR_CLK7 Setting scan repeat On/Off as much as set scan Clock 7.
- _LOGIC_RESULT Logic result Indicates logic results.
On during 1 scan in case of operation
F0110 _LER operation error
error.
F0111 _ZERO Zero flag On when operation result is 0.
F011
F0112 _CARRY Carry flag On when carry occurs during operation.
F0113 _ALL_Off All output OFF On in case that all output is Off.
Operation error
F0115 _LER_LATCH Keeps On during operation error.
Latch
- _CMP_RESULT Comparison result Indicates the comparison result.
F0120 _LT LT flag On in case of less than.
F0121 _LTE LTE flag On in case of equal or less than.
F012 F0122 _EQU EQU flag On in case of equal.
F0123 _GT GT flag On in case of greater than.
F0124 _GTE GTE flag On in case of equal or greater than.
F0125 _NEQ NEQ flag On in case of not equal.
F014 - _FALS_NUM FALS no. Indicates FALS no.
F015 - _PUTGET_ERR0 PUT/GET error 0 Main base Put / Get error.
F023 - _PUTGET_NDR0 PUT/GET end 0 Main base Put/Get end.
F044 - _CPU_TYPE CPU Type Indicates information for CPU Type.
F045 - _CPU_VER CPU version Indicates CPU version.
F046 - _OS_VER OS version Indicates OS version.
F048 - _OS_DATE OS date Indicates OS distribution date.
F050 - _SCAN_MAX Max. scan time Indicates max. scan time.
F051 - _SCAN_MIN Min. scan time Indicates min. scan time.
F052 - _SCAN_CUR Current scan time Current scan time.
F0053 - _MON_YEAR Month/year Clock data (month/year)
F0054 - _TIME_DAY Hour/date Clock data (hour/date)
F0055 - _SEC_MIN Second/minute Clock data (Second/minute)
F0056 - _HUND_WK Hundred year/week Clock data (Hundred year/week)

App. 1-4
Appendix 1 Flag List

Word Bit Variable Function Description


- _FPU_INFO N/A -
F0570 _FPU_LFLAG_I N/A -
F0571 _FPU_LFLAG_U N/A -
F0572 _FPU_LFLAG_O N/A -
F0573 _FPU_LFLAG_Z N/A -
F0574 _FPU_LFLAG_V N/A -
F057
F057A _FPU_FLAG_I N/A -
F057B _FPU_FLAG_U N/A -
F057C _FPU_FLAG_O N/A -
F057D _FPU_FLAG_Z N/A -
F057E _FPU_FLAG_V N/A -
F057F _FPU_FLAG_E Irregular input Reports in case of irregular input.
F058 - _ERR_STEP Error step Saves error step.
F060 - _REF_COUNT Refresh Increase when module Refresh.
F062 - _REF_OK_CNT Refresh OK Increase when module Refresh is normal.
Increase when module Refresh is
F064 - _REF_NG_CNT Refresh NG
Abnormal.
Increase when module Refresh is
F066 - _REF_LIM_CNT Refresh Limit
abnormal (Time Out).
Increase when module Refresh is
F068 - _REF_ERR_CNT Refresh Error
Abnormal.
F070 - _MOD_RD_ERR_CNT - -
F072 - _MOD_WR_ERR_CNT - -
F074 - _CA_CNT - -
F076 - _CA_LIM_CNT - -
F078 - _CA_ERR_CNT - -
F080 - _BUF_FULL_CNT Buffer Full Increase when CPU internal buffer is full.
F082 - _PUT_CNT Put count Increase when Put count.
F084 - _GET_CNT Get count Increase when Get count.
F086 - _KEY Current key indicates the current state of local key.
F088 - _KEY_PREV Previous key indicates the previous state of local key
F090 - _IO_TYER_N Mismatch slot Module Type mismatched slot no.
F091 - _IO_DEER_N Detach slot Module detached slot no.
F093 - _IO_RWER_N RW error slot Module read/write error slot no.
F094 - _IP_IFER_N IF error slot Module interface error slot no.
F096 - _IO_TYER0 Module Type 0 error Main base module Type error.

App. 1-4
Appendix 1 Flag List

Word Bit Variable Function Description


F104 - _IO_DEER0 Module Detach 0 error Main base module Detach error.
F120 - _IO_RWER0 Module RW 0 error Main base module read/write error.
F128 - _IO_IFER_0 Module IF 0 error Main base module interface error.
F140 - _AC_FAIL_CNT Power shutdown times Saves the times of power shutdown.
F142 - _ERR_HIS_CNT Error occur times Saves the times of error occur.
F144 - _MOD_HIS_CNT Mode conversion times Saves the times of mode conversion.
F146 - _SYS_HIS_CNT History occur times Saves the times of system history.
F148 - _LOG_ROTATE Log Rotate Saves log rotate information.
F150 - _BASE_INFO0 Slot information 0 Main base slot information.
- _USER_WRITE_F Available contact point Contact point available in program.
F2000 _RTC_WR RTC RW Data write and read in RTC.
F2001 _SCAN_WR Scan WR Initializing the value of scan.
F200 Request detection of
F2002 _CHK_ANC_ERR Request detection of external error.
external serious error
Request detection of
Request detection of external slight error
F2003 _CHK_ANC_WAR external slight error
(warning).
(warning)
- _USER_STAUS_F User contact point User contact point.
F201
F2010 _INIT_DONE Initialization completed Initialization complete displayed.
Display information of Display information of external serious
F202 - _ANC_ERR
external serious error error
Display information of
Display information of external slight
F203 - _ANC_WAR external slight error
error (warning)
(warning)
F210 - _MON_YEAR_DT Month/year Clock data (month/year)
F211 - _TIME_DAY_DT Hour/date Clock data (hour/date)
F212 - _SEC_MIN_DT Second/minute Clock data (Second/minute)
F213 - _HUND_WK_DT Hundred year/week Clock data (Hundred year/week)

App. 1-6
Appendix 1 Flag List

Appendix 1.2 Communication Relay (L) List

Here describes data link communication relay(L).

1. High-speed Link 1

Device Keyword Type Description


High speed link parameter 1 normal operation of all station
Indicates normal operation of all station according to parameter set
in High speed link, and On under the condition as below.
1. In case that all station set in parameter is RUN mode and no
L000 _HS1_RLINK Bit error,
2. All data block set in parameter is communicated normally, and
3. The parameter set in each station itself is communicated
normally.
Once RUN_LINK is On, it keeps On unless stopped by
LINK_DISABLE.
Abnormal state after _HS1RLINK On
In the state of _HSmRLINK flag On, if communication state of the
station set in the parameter and data block is as follows, this flag
shall be On.
1. In case that the station set in the parameter is not RUN mode, or
L001 _HS1_LTRBL Bit 2. There is an error in the station set in the parameter, or
3. The communication state of data block set in the parameter is not
good.
LINK TROUBLE shall be On if the above 1, 2 & 3 conditions occur,
and if the condition return to the normal state, it shall be OFF
again.
High speed link parameter 1, K block general state
L0020 ~ _HS1_STATE[k] Bit Indicates the general state of communication information for each
L005F (k = 00~63) Array data block of setting parameter.
_HS1_STATE[k] = HS1MOD[k]&_HS1TRX[k]&(~_HS1_ERR[k])
High speed link parameter 1, k block station RUN operation mode
L0060 ~ _HS1_MOD[k] Bit
L009F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates operation mode of station set in K data block of
parameter.
Normal communication with High speed link parameter 1, k block
L0100 ~ _HS1_TRX[k] Bit station
L013F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates if communication state of Kdata of parameter is
communicated smoothly according to the setting.
High speed link parameter 1, K block station operation error mode
L0140 ~ _HS1_ERR[k] Bit
L017F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates if the error occurs in the communication state of k data
block of parameter.
L0180 ~ Bit High speed link parameter 1, K block setting
_HS1_SETBLOCK[k]
L021F Array Indicates whether or not to set k data block of parameter.

App. 1-6
Appendix 1 Flag List

2. High-speed Link2

Device Keyword Type Description


High-speed link parameter 2 normal operation of all station.
Indicates normal operation of all station according to parameter set in
High-speed link and On under the condition as below.
L0260 _HS2_RLINK Bit 1. In case that all station set in parameter is Run mode and no error
2. All data block set in parameter is communicated and
3.The parameter set in each station itself is communicated normally.
Once RUN_LINK is On, it keeps On unless stopped by LINK_DISABLE.
Abnormal state after _HS2RLINK On.
In the state of _HSmRLINK flag On, if communication state of the station
set in the parameter and data block is as follows, this flag shall be On.
1. In case that the station set in the parameter is not RUN mode, or
L0261 _HS2_LTRBL Bit 2. There is an error in the station set in the parameter, or
3. The communication state of data block set in the parameter is not
good.
LINK TROUBLE shall be On if the above 1, 2 & 3 conditions occur, and
if the condition return to the normal state, it shall be OFF again.
High speed link parameter 1, k block general state.
L0280 ~ _HS2_STATE[k] Bit Indicates the general state of communication information for each data
L031F (k = 00~63) Array block of setting parameter.
_HS2_STATE[k]=HS2MOD[k]&_HS2TRX[k]&(~_HS2_ERR[k])
L0320 ~ _HS2_MOD[k] Bit High speed link parameter 1, k block station RUN operation mode.
L035F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates operation mode of station set in k data block of parameter.
Normal communication with High speed link parameter 1, K block
L0360 ~ _HS2_TRX[k] Bit station.
L039F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates if communication state of K data of parameter is
communicated smoothly according to the setting.
High speed link parameter 1, K block station operation error mode.
L0400 ~ _HS2_ERR[k] Bit
L043F (k = 00~63) Array Indicates if the error occurs in the communication state of k data block of
parameter.
L0440 ~ Bit High speed link parameter 1, K block setting.
_HS2_SETBLOCK[k]
L047F Array Indicates whether or not to set k data block of parameter.

App. 1-7
Appendix 1 Flag List

3. Common area

Communication flag list according to P2P service setting.


P2P parameter: 1~3, P2P block: 0~31

Device Keyword Type Description


Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service
L5120 _P2P1_NDR00 Bit
normal end.
Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service
L5121 _P2P1_ERR00 Bit
abnormal end.
Indicates error code in case of P2P parameter 1, 0 Block
L513 _P2P1_STATUS00 Word
service abnormal end.
Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service
L514 _P2P1_SVCCNT00 DWord
normal count.
Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service
L516 _P2P1_ERRCNT00 DWord
abnormal count.
L5180 _P2P1_NDR01 Bit P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service normal end.

L5181 _P2P1_ERR01 Bit P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service abnormal end.


Indicates error code in case of P2P parameter 1, 1 Block
L519 _P2P1_STATUS01 Word
service abnormal end.
Indicates P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service
L520 _P2P1_SVCCNT01 DWord
normal count.
Indicates P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service
L522 _P2P1_ERRCNT01 DWord
abnormal count.
L524~L529 - Word P2P parameter 1,2 Block service total.

L530~L535 - Word P2P parameter 1,3 Block service total.

L536~L697 - Word P2P parameter 1,4~30 Block service total.

L698~L703 - Word P2P parameter 1,31 Block service total.

App. 1-9
Appendix 1 Flag List

Appendix 1.3 Network Register (N) List


Here describes Network Register for communication (N). P2P parameter: 1~3, P2P block: 0~31

Device Keyword Type Description


N000 _P1B00SN Word Saves another station no. of P2P parameter 1, 00 block.

N0000~0004 _P1B00RD1 Word Saves area device 1 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N005 _P1B00RS1 Word Saves area size 1 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0006~0009 _P1B00RD2 Word Saves area device 2 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N010 _P1B00RS2 Word Saves area size 2 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0011~0014 _P1B00RD3 Word Saves area device 3 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N015 _P1B00RS3 Word Saves area size 3 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0016~0019 _P1B00RD4 Word Saves area device 4 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N020 _P1B00RS4 Word Saves area size 4 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0021~0024 _P1B00WD1 Word Saves area device 1 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N025 _P1B00WS1 Word Saves area size 1 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0026~0029 _P1B00WD2 Word Saves area device 2 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N030 _P1B00WS2 Word Saves area size 2 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0031~0034 _P1B00WD3 Word Saves area device 3 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N035 _P1B00WS3 Word Saves area size 3 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0036~0039 _P1B00WD4 Word Saves area device 4 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N040 _P1B00WS4 Word Saves area size 4 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0041~0081 - Word Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 01 block.

N0082~0122 - Word Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 02 block. P2P

N0123~1311 - Word Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 03~31 block.

N1312~2623 - Word Saving area of P2P parameter 2.

N2624~3935 - Word Saving area of P2P parameter 3.

Remark

In XGB series, Network register is available only monitoring. (Read Only)

App. 1-9
Appendix 2 Dimension

Appendix 2 Dimension (Unit: mm)


(1) standard type main unit (S type)
-. XBM-DN16S/32S

XBM-DN16S
PWR
RUN
ERR

RS-232C

RUN

P00~07 P20~27

-. XBM-DR16S

XBM-DR16S
PWR
RUN
ERR

RS-232C

RUN

P00~07 P20~27

App.2
Appendix 2 Dimension

(2) Compact type main unit (H type)


-. XBC-DN32H(/DC)

-. XBC-DR32H (/DC)

App.2
Appendix 2 Dimension

-. XBC-DN64H (/DC)

-. XBC-DR64H (/DC)

App.2
Appendix 2 Dimension

(3) Extension I/O module

-. XBE-DC32A, XBE-TN32A, XBE-TP32A

B A
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01

-. XBE-RY16A

App.2
Appendix 2 Dimension

-. XBE-DC08A, XBE-DC16A, XBE-TN08A, XBE-TP08A, XBE-TN16A, XBE-TP16A

-. XBE-DR16A, XBE-RY08A

App.2
Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

MASTER-K XGB

Device Function Symbol Device Function

F0000 RUN mode _RUN F0000 RUN Edit mode


F0001 Program mode _STOP F0001 Program mode
F0002 Pause mode _ERROR F0002 Error mode
F0003 Debug mode _DEBUG F0003 Debug mode
F0004 N/A _LOCAL_CON F0006 Remote mode
F0005 N/A _MODBUS_CON F0006 Remote mode
F0006 Remote mode _REMOTE_CON F0006 Remote mode
F0007 User memory setup - F0007 N/A
F0008 N/A _RUN_EDIT_ST F0008 Editing during RUN
F0009 N/A _RUN_EDIT_CHK F0009 Editing during RUN
F000A User memory operation _RUN_EDIT_DONE F000A Edit done during RUN
F000B N/A _RUN_EDIT_END F000B Edit end during RUN
F000C N/A _CMOD_KEY F000C Operation mode change by KEY
F000D N/A _CMOD_LPADT F000D Operation mode change by PADT
Operation mode change by Remote
F000E N/A _CMOD_RPADT F000E
PADT
Operation mode change cause by
F000F STOP command execution _CMOD_RLINK F000F
remote communication module
F0010 Ordinary time On _FORCE_IN F0010 Forced input
F0011 Ordinary time Off _FORCE_OUT F0011 Forced output
F0012 1 Scan On _SKIP_ON F0012 I/O Skip execution
F0013 1 Scan Off _EMASK_ON F0013 Error mask execution
F0014 Reversal every Scan _MON_ON F0014 Monitor execution
_USTOP_ON F0015 Stop by Stop Function
_ESTOP_ON F0016 Stop by ESTOP Function
_CONPILE_MODE F0017 Compile
F0015 ~
F001C N/A
_INIT_RUN F0018 Initialize
F0019 ~
- F001F N/A

_PB1 F001C Program Code 1


F001D N/A _PB2 F001D Program Code 2
F001E N/A _CB1 F001E Compile code 1
F001F N/A _CB2 F001F Compile code 2

App. 3-1
Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

MASTER-K XGB

Device Function Symbol Device Function

F0020 1 Step RUN _CPU_ER F0020 CPU configuration error


F0021 Break Point RUN _IO_TYER F0021 Module type mismatch error
F0022 Scan RUN _IO_DEER F0022 Module detach error
F0023 Contact value match RUN _FUSE_ER F0023 Fuse cutoff error
F0024 Word value match RUN _IO_RWER F0024 I/O module read/write error
Special/communication module interface
_IP_IFER F0025
error
Heavy error detection of external
_ANNUM_ER F0026
equipment error
- F0027 N/A
_BPRM_ER F0028 Basic parameter error
_IOPRM_ER F0029 I/O configuration parameter error
F0025 ~
N/A _SPPRM_ER F002A Special module parameter error
F002F
Communication module parameter
_CPPRM_ER F002B
error
_PGM_ER F002C Program error
_CODE_ER F002D Program Code error
_SWDT_ER F002E System watchdog error
_BASE_POWER
F002F Base power error
_ER
F0030 Heavy error _WDT_ER F0030 Scan watchdog
F0031 Light error - F0031 -
F0032 WDT error - F0032 -
F0033 I/O combination error - F0033 -
F0034 Battery voltage error - F0034 -
F0035 Fuse error - F0035 -
F0036 ~ F0036 ~
N/A - -
F0038 F0038
F0039 Backup normal - F0039 -
F003A Clock data error - F003A -
F003B Program change - F003B -
F003C Program change error - F003C -
F003D ~ F003D ~
N/A - N/A
F003F F003F
_RTC_ER F0040 RTC data error

_DBCK_ER F0041 Data backup error

_HBCK_ER F0042 Hot restart disabled error


F0040~ _ABSD_ER F0043 Abnormal operation stop
N/A
F005F
_TASK_ER F0044 Task collision

_BAT_ER F0045 Battery error


Light error detection of external
_ANNUM_ER F0046
equipment

App. 3-2
Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

MASTER-K XGB

Device Function Symbol Device Function

_LOG_FULL F0047 Log memory full warning

_HS_WAR1 F0048 High speed link parameter 1 error

_HS_WAR2 F0049 High speed link parameter 2 error

- F004A ~ F0053 N/A

_P2P_WAR1 F0054 P2P parameter 1 error


F0040 ~ F005F N/A
_P2P_WAR2 F0055 P2P parameter 2 error

_P2P_WAR3 F0056 P2P parameter 3 error

- F0057 ~ F005B N/A

_Constant_ER F005C Constant error

- F005D ~ F005F N/A

F0060 ~ F006F Error Code save - F0060 ~ F006F N/A

F0070 ~ F008F Fuse cutoff save - F0070 ~ F008F N/A

F0090 20ms cycle Clock _T20MS F0090 20ms cycle Clock

F0091 100ms cycle Clock _T100MS F0091 100ms cycle Clock

F0092 200ms cycle Clock _T200MS F0092 200ms cycle Clock

F0093 1s cycle Clock _T1S F0093 1s cycle Clock

F0094 2s cycle Clock _T2S F0094 2s cycle Clock

F0095 10s cycle Clock _T10S F0095 10s cycle Clock

F0096 20s cycle Clock _T20S F0096 20s cycle Clock

F0097 60s cycle Clock _T60S F0097 60s cycle Clock

- F0098 N/A

_ON F0099 Ordinary time On

_OFF F009A Ordinary time Off


F0098 ~F009F
N/A _1ON F009B 1 Scan On

_1OFF F009C 1 Scan Off

_STOG F009D Reversal every Scan

- F009B ~ F009F N/A

F0100 User Clock 0 - F0100 User Clock 0

F0101 User Clock 1 - F0101 User Clock 1

F0102 User Clock 2 - F0102 User Clock 2

F0103 User Clock 3 - F0103 User Clock 3

F0104 User Clock 4 - F0104 User Clock 4

F0105 User Clock 5 - F0105 User Clock 5

F0106 User Clock 6 - F0106 User Clock 6

F0107 User Clock 7 - F0107 User Clock 7

App. 3-3
Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

MASTER-K XGB

Device Function Symbol Device Function

F0108 ~ F010F - F0108 ~ F010F N/A

F0110 Operation error flag _Ler F0110 Operation error flag

F0111 Zero flag _Zero F0111 Zero flag

F0112 Carry flag _Carry F0112 Carry flag

F0113 Full output Off _All_Off F0113 Full output Off


Common RAM R/W
F0114 - F0114 N/A
error
Operation error flag
F0115 _Ler_Latch F0115 Operation error flag(latch)
(latch)
F0116 ~ F011F - F0116 ~ F011F N/A

F0120 LT flag _LT F0120 LT flag

F0121 LTE flag _LTE F0121 LTE flag

F0122 EQU flag _EQU F0122 EQU flag

F0123 GT flag _GT F0123 GT flag

F0124 GTE flag _GTE F0124 GTE flag

F0125 NEQ flag _NEQ F0125 NEQ flag

F0126 ~ F012F N/A - F0126 ~ F012F N/A

F0130~ F013F AC Down Count _AC_F_CNT F0130~ F013F AC Down Count

F0140~ F014F FALS no. _FALS_NUM F0140~ F014F FALS no.

_PUTGET_ERR F0150~ F030F PUT/GET error flag

CPU TYPE F0440 ~ F044F CPU TYPE


F0150~ F015F PUT/GET error flag
CPU VERSION F0450 ~ F045F CPU VERSION

OS version no. F0460 ~ F047F System OS version no.

F0160~ F049F N/A OS date F0480 ~ F049F System OS DATE

App. 3-4
Appendix 3 Compatibility with MASTER-K (Special Relay)

MASTER-K XGB

Device Function Symbol Device Function

F0500~ F050F Max. Scan time _SCAN_MAX F0500~ F050F Max. Scan time

F0510~ F051F Min. Scan time _SCAN_MIN F0510~ F051F Min. Scan time

F0520~ F052F Current Scan time _SCAN_CUR F0520~ F052F Current Scan time
Clock data
F0530~ F053F _YEAR_MON F0530~ F053F Clock data (year/month)
(year/month)
F0540~ F054F Clock data (day/hr) _DAY_TIME F0540~ F054F Clock data(day/hr)

F0550~ F055F Clock data (min/sec) _MIN_SEC F0550~ F055F Clock data(min/sec)
Clock data
F0560~ F056F _HUND_WK F0560~ F056F Clock data(100year/weekday)
(100year/weekday)
_FPU_LFlag_I F0570 -

_FPU_LFlag_U F0571 -

_FPU_LFlag_O F0572 -

_FPU_LFlag_Z F0573 -

_FPU_LFlag_V F0574 -

- F0575 ~ F0579 N/A

F0570~ F058F N/A _FPU_Flag_I F057A -

_FPU_Flag_U F057B -

_FPU_Flag_O F057C -

_FPU_Flag_Z F057D -

_FPU_Flag_V F057E -

_FPU_Flag_E F057F -

Error Step F0580~ F058F Error step save

F0590~ F059F Error step save - F0590~ F059F N/A


FMM detailed error
F0600~ F060F _REF_COUNT F060~F061 Refresh Count
information
_REF_OK_CNT F062~F063 Refresh OK Count

_REF_NG_CNT F064~F065 Refresh NG Count

_REF_LIM_CNT F066~F067 Refresh Limit Count

_REF_ERR_CNT F068~F069 Refresh Error Count

_MOD_RD_ERR_CNT F070~F071 MODULE Read Error Count


F0610~ F063F N/A
_MOD_WR_ERR_CNT F072~F073 MODULE Write Error Count

_CA_CNT F074~F075 Cmd Access Count

_CA_LIM_CNT F076~F077 Cmd Access Limit Count

_CA_ERR_CNT F078~F079 Cmd Access Error Count

_BUF_FULL_CNT F080~F081 Buffer Full Count

App. 3-5
Appendix 4 Instruction List

Appendix 4 Instruction List


Appendix 4.1 Classification of Instructions
Classification Instructions Details Remarks
Contact Point Instruction LOAD, AND, OR related Instructions
Unite Instruction AND LOAD, OR LOAD, MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP
Reverse Instruction NOT
Master Control Instruction MCS, MCSCLR
OUT, SET, RST, 1 Scan Output Instruction, Output Reverse
Output Instruction
Basic Instruction (FF)
Instructions Sequence/Last-input
Step Control Instruction ( SET Sxx.xx, OUT Sxx.xx )
Preferred Instruction
End Instruction END
Non-Process Instruction NOP
Timer Instruction TON, TOFF, TMR, TMON, TRTG
Counter Instruction CTD, CTU, CTUD, CTR
4/8/64 Bits
Data Transfer Instruction Transfers specified Data, Group, String
available
4/8 Bits
Conversion Instruction Converts BIN/BCD of specified Data & Group
available
Data Type Conversion
Converts Integer/Real Number
Instruction
Output Terminal Compare Compare to
Saves compared results in special relay
Instruction Unsigned
Input Terminal Compare Saves compared results in BR. Compares Real Number, Compare to
Instruction String & Group. Compares 3 Operands Signed
Increase/Decrease 4/8 Bits
Increases or decreases specified data 1 by 1
Instruction available
Rotates specified data to the left and right, 4/8 Bits
Rotate Instruction
including Carry available
Moves specified data to the left and right, word by word, bit 4/8 Bits
Move Instruction
by bit available
Exchanges between devices, higher & lower byte, group
Exchange Instruction
data
Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division for Integer/
BIN Operation Instruction Real Number, Addition for String, Addition & Subtraction for
Group
BCD Operation Instruction Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division.
Application Logic Multiplication, Logic Addition, Exclusive OR, Exclusive
Instructions Logic Operation Instruction
NOR, Group Operation
Error Display, WDT Initialize, Output Control, Operation
System Instruction
Stop, etc.
Encode, Decode, Data Disconnect/Connect, Search, Align,
Data Process Instruction
Max., Min., Total, Average, etc.
Data Table Process
Data Input/Output of Data Table
Instruction
String related Convert, Comment Read, String Extract,
String Process Instruction
ASCII Convert, HEX Convert, String Search, etc.
Special Function Trigonometric Function, Exponential/Log Function, Angle/
Instruction Radian Convert, etc.
Data Control Instruction Max/Min Limit Control, Dead-zone Control, Zone Control
Time related Instruction Date Time Data Read/Write, Time Data Adjust & Convert
Diverge Instruction JMP, CALL
Loop Instruction FOR/NEXT/BREAK
Flag related Instruction Carry Flag Set/Reset, Error Flag Clear
Special/Communication
Data Read/Write by BUSCON Direct Access
related Instruction
Interrupt related Instruction Interrupt Enable/Disable
Signal Reverse Instruction Reverse Integer/Real Signals, Absolute Value Operation

App. 4-1
Appendix 4 Instruction List

Appendix 4.2 Basic Instructions


1) Contact point instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
LOAD A Contact Point Operation Start

LOAD NOT B Contact Point Operation Start


A Contact Point Series-
AND
Connected
B Contact Point Series-
AND NOT
Connected
A Contact Point Parallel-
OR
Connected
B Contact Point Parallel-
OR NOT
Contact Connected
Point Positive Convert Detected
LOADP P
Contact Point
Negative Convert Detected
LOADN N
Contact Point
Positive Convert Detected
ANDP P
Contact Point Series-Connected
Negative Convert Detected
ANDN N
Contact Point Series-Connected
Positive Convert Detected
ORP P Contact Point Parallel-
C
Negativet Convert
d Detected
ORN N Contact Point Parallel-
C t d
2) Union instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

AND LOAD A B A,B Block Series-Connected

A
OR LOAD A,B Block Parallel-Connected
B

Unite Operation Result Push up to


MPUSH
present
MPUSH
Operation Result Load
MLOAD MLOAD
Previous to Diverge Point

MPOP Operation Result Pop Previous


MPOP
to Diverge Point

App. 4-2
Appendix 4 Instruction List

3) Reverse instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Previous Operation results
Reverse NOT
Reverse

4) Master Control instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

MCS MCS n Master Control Setting (n:0~7)


Master
Control
MCSCLR MCSCLR n Master Control Cancel (n:0~7)

5) Output instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

OUT Operation Results Output

Operation Results Reverse


OUT NOT
Output
1 Scan Output if Input
OUTP P
Condition rises
1 Scan Output if Input
Output OUTN N
Condition falls

SET S Contact Point Output ON kept

Contact Point Output OFF


RST R
kept
Output Reverse if Input
FF FF D
Condition rises

6) Sequence/Last-input preferred instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Syy.xx
SET S Sequence Control
S
Step
Control
Syy.xx
OUT S Last-input Preferred

7) End instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
End END END Program End

8) Non-process instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Non-Process Instruction, used
Non-Process NOP Ladder not displayed
in Nimonic

App. 4-3
Appendix 4 Instruction List

9) Timer instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Input
TON TON T t t
T
Input
TOFF TOFF T t t
T
Input t1+t2 = t

TMR TMR T t t1 t2

Timer
T
Input
t
TMON TMON T t
T

Input
TRTG TRTG T t t
T

10) Counter instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTD CTD C c
Present

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTU CTU C c
Present

Output

Counter Reset
Increased
Pulse
Decreased
Pulse
CTUD CTUD C U D c
Setting

Present

Output

Reset
Count
Pulse Setting
CTR CTR C c
Present

Output

App. 4-4
Appendix 4 Instruction List

Appendix 4.3 Application Instruction

1) Data transfer instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
MOV MOV S D
16 bits
(S) (D)
Transfer
MOVP MOVP S D

DMOV DMOV S D
32 bits
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
Transfer
DMOVP DMOVP S D

Short RMOV RMOV S D


Real Number (S+1,S) (D+1,D )
Transfer RMOVP RMOVP S D

Long LMOV LMOV S D


(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
Real Number
Transfer LMOVP LMOVP S D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

(Sb): Bit Position


MOV4 MOV4 Sb Db b15 b0
4 bits 4bit trans
Transfer
MOV4P MOV4P Sb Db
(Db): Bit Position

(Sb): Bit Position


MOV8 MOV8 Sb Db b15 b0
8 bits
8bit trans
Transfer
MOV8P MOV8P Sb Db
(Db): Bit Position

CMOV CMOV S D 1s complement


(S) (D)
CMOVP CMOVP S D
1s complement
Transfer
DCMOV DCMOV S D 1s complement

(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DCMOVP DCMOVP S D

GMOV GMOV S D N (S) (D)


16 bits N
Group Transfer
GMOVP GMOVP S D N

FMOV FMOV S D N (S) (D)


Multiple
N
Transfer
FMOVP FMOVP S D N

b15 b0
BMOV BMOV S D N (S)
Specified Bits
Transfer (D)
BMOVP BMOVP S D N * Z: Control Word

(S) b15 b0
GBMOV GBMOV S D Z N : N
Specified Bits (S+N)
(D)

Group Transfer
:
GBMOVP GBMOVP S D Z N
(D+N)

* Z: Control Word

App. 4-5
Appendix 4 Instruction List

1) Data Transfer Instruction (continued)


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
$MOV $MOV S D
String String started from (S)
Transfer String started from (D)
$MOVP $MOVP S D

2) BCD/BIN conversion instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
To BCD
BCD BCD S D (S) (D)

BCD BCDP BCDP S D BIN( 0~9999 )
Conversion To BCD
DBCD DBCD S D
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DBCDP DBCDP S D BIN( 0~99999999 )

(Sb):Bit, BIN(0~9)
BCD4 BCD4 Sb Db
b15 b0

To 4bit BCD

BCD4P BCD4P Sb Db
4/8 Bits (Db): Bit
BCD
Conversion (Sb):Bit, BIN(0~99)
BCD8 BCD8 Sb Db
b15 b0

To 8bit BCD
BCD8P BCD8P Sb Db
(Db):Bit

BIN BIN S D To BIN


(S) (D)
BIN BINP BINP S D BCD( 0~9999 )
Conversion
DBIN DBIN S D To BIN
(S+1,S) (D+1,D )
DBINP DBINP S D
BCD( 0~99999999 )

BIN4 BIN4 Sb Db (Sb):Bit, BCD(0~9)


b15 b0

To 4bit BIN
BIN4P BIN4P Sb Db
4/8 Bits (Db):Bit
BIN
Conversion (Sb):Bit, BCD(0~99)
BIN8 BIN8 Sb Db
b15 b0

To bit BIN
BIN8P BIN8P Sb Db
(Db):Bit

GBCD GBCD S D N
Data (S) to N converted to BCD, and
(D) to N saved
Group GBCDP GBCDP S D N
BCD,BIN
Conversion GBIN GBIN S D N
Data (S) to N converted to BIN, and
(D) to N saved
GBINP GBINP S D N

App. 4-6
Appendix 4 Instruction List

3) Data type conversion instruction


Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
I2R I2R S D To Real
(S) (D+1,D)
16 Bits I2RP I2RP S D Int( -32768~32767 )
Integer/Real
Conversion I2L I2L S D
To Long
(S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

Int( -32768~32767 )
I2LP I2LP S D

D2R D2R S D To Real


(S+1,S) (D+1,D)

32 Bits D2RP D2RP S D Dint(-2147483648~2147483647)
Integer/Real
Conversion D2L To Long
D2L S D (S+1,S) (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

D2LP D2LP S D Dint(-2147483648~2147483647)

R2I R2I S D To INT


(S+1,S) (D)
Short R2IP R2IP S D Whole Sing Real Range
Real/Integer
Conversion R2D R2D S D To DINT
(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
R2DP R2DP S D Whole Sing Real Range

To INT
L2I L2I S D (S+3,S+2,S+1,S) (D)

Whole Double Real Range
Long L2IP L2IP S D
Real/Integer
Conversion L2D L2D S D
To DINT
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S) (D+1,D)

Whole Double Real Range
L2DP L2DP S D

Remark

1) Integer value and Real value will be saved respectively in quite different format. For such reason, Real
Number Data should be converted as applicable before used for Integer Operation.

App. 4-7
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction
Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
CMP CMP S1 S2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag SET
Unsigned
(S1, S2 is Word)
Compare CMPP CMPP S1 S2
with Special
Relay DCMP DCMP S1 S2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag SET
used
(S1, S2 is Double Word)
DCMPP DCMPP S1 S2

CMP4 CMP4 S1 S2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag SET

(S1, S2 is Nibble)
CMP4P CMP4P S1 S2
4/8 Bits
Compare
CMP8 CMP8 S1 S2
CMP(S1,S2) and applicable Flag SET

(S1, S2 is Byte)
CMP8P CMP8P S1 S2

CMP(S1,S2))
TCMP TCMP S1 S2 D
:
CMP(S1+15,S2+15)
Table TCMPP TCMPP S1 S2 D Result:(D) ~ (D+15), 1 if identical
Compare
DTCMP DTCMP S1 S2 D CMP((S1+1,S1),(S2+1,S2))
:
CMP((S1+31,S1+30),(S2+31,S2+30))
DTCMPP DTCMPP S1 S2 D Result:(D) ~ (D+15)

GEQ GEQ S1 S2 D N

GEQP GEQP S1 S2 D N

GGT GGT S1 S2 D N

GGTP GGTP S1 S2 D N

GLT GLT S1 S2 D N
Compares S1 data to S2 data word
Group GLTP GLTP S1 S2 D N by word, and saves its result in
Compare Device (D) bit by bit from the lower
(16 Bits) GGE GGE S1 S2 D N bit
( N 16 )
GGEP GGEP S1 S2 D N

GLE GLE S1 S2 D N

GLEP GLEP S1 S2 D N

GNE GNE S1 S2 D N

GNEP GNEP S1 S2 D N

Remark

1) CMP(P), DCMP(P), CMP4(P), CMP8(P), TCMP(P) & DTCMP(P) Instructions all process the results of
Unsigned Compare. All the other Compare Instructions will perform Signed Compare.

App. 4-8
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

GDEQ GDEQ S1 S2 D N

GDEQP GDEQP S1 S2 D N

GDGT GDGT S1 S2 D N

GDGTP GDGTP S1 S2 D N

GDLT GDLT S1 S2 D N
Compares S1 data to S2 data 2 by
Group GDLTP GDLTP S1 S2 D N 2 words, and saves its result in
Compare Device (D) bit by bit from the lower
(32 Bits) GDGE GDGE S1 S2 D N bit
( N 16 )
GDGEP GDGEP S1 S2 D N

GDLE GDLE S1 S2 D N

GDLEP GDLEP S1 S2 D N

GDNE GDNE S1 S2 D N

GDNEP GDNEP S1 S2 D N

App. 4-9
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
LOAD= = S1 S2

LOAD> > S1 S2
16 Bits Compares (S1) to (S2), and saves
Data LOAD< < S1 S2
its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed

Compare Operation)
LOAD>= >= S1 S2
(LOAD)
LOAD<= <= S1 S2

LOAD<> <> S1 S2

AND= = S1 S2

AND> > S1 S2
Performs AND operation of (S1) &
16 Bits
AND< < S1 S2 (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
Data
(BR), and then saves its result in BR
Compare AND>= >= S1 S2 (Signed Operation)
(AND)
AND<= <= S1 S2

AND<> <> S1 S2

OR= = S1 S2
Performs OR operation of (S1) &
16 Bits
(S2) Compare Result and Bit Result
Data
OR<= (BR), and then saves its result in BR
Compare <= S1 S2
(Signed Operation)
(OR)
OR<> <> S1 S2

LOADD= D= S1 S2

LOADD> D> S1 S2
32 Bits Compares (S1) to (S2), and saves
Data LOADD< D< S1 S2
its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed
Compare Operation)
LOADD>= D>= S1 S2
(LOAD)
LOADD<= D<= S1 S2

LOADD<> D<> S1 S2

Remark

Comparison instruction for input process the result of Signed comparison instruction generally. To process
Unsigned comparison, Use comparison instruction for input.

App. 4-10
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
ANDD= D= S1 S2

ANDD> D> S1 S2
32 Bits Performs AND operation of (S1) &
Data ANDD< D< S1 S2
(S2) Compare Result and Bit Result

Compare (BR), and then saves its result in
ANDD>= D>= S1 S2
(AND) BR (Signed Operation)
ANDD<= D<= S1 S2

ANDD<> D<> S1 S2

ORD= D= S1 S2

ORD> D> S1 S2

32bt ORD< Performs OR operation of (S1) &


D< S1 S2
Data (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result

Compare (BR), and then saves its result in
(OR) ORD>= D>= S1 S2 BR (Signed Operation)

ORD<= D<= S1 S2

ORD<> D<> S1 S2

LOADR= R= S1 S2

LOADR> R> S1 S2

Short LOADR< R< S1 S2


Performs OR operation of (S1) &
Real Number (S2) Compare Result and Bit Result

Compare (BR), and then saves its result in
(LOAD) LOADR>= R>= S1 S2
BR (Signed Operation)

LOADR<= R<= S1 S2

LOADR<> R<> S1 S2

ANDR= R= S1 S2

ANDR> R> S1 S2

Short ANDR< R< S1 S2 Compares (S1+1,S) to (S2+1,S2)


Real Number
and saves its result in Bit Result
Compare
ANDR>= R>= S1 S2 (BR) (Signed Operation)
(AND)

ANDR<= R<= S1 S2

ANDR<> R<> S1 S2

App. 4-11
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

ORR= R= S1 S2

ORR> R> S1 S2

ORR< Compares (S1+1,S1) to (S2+1,S2)


Real Number R< S1 S2
and saves its result in Bit Result
Compare
(BR) (Signed Operation)
(OR)
ORR>= R>= S1 S2

ORR<= R<= S1 S2

ORR<> R<> S1 S2

LOADL= L= S1 S2

LOADL> L> S1 S2

Long Compares (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S) to


Real Number LOADL< L< S1 S2 (S2+3,S2+2, S2+1,S2) and saves its
Compare result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed
(LOAD) LOADL>= L>= S1 S2 Operation)

LOADL<= L<= S1 S2

LOADL<> L<> S1 S2

ANDL= L= S1 S2

ANDL> L> S1 S2

Performs AND operation of (S1+


Long ANDL< L< S1 S2 1,S1) & (S2+1,S2) Compare Result
Real Number
and Bit Result(BR), and then saves
Compare
ANDL>= L>= S1 S2 its result in BR (Signed Operation)
(AND)

ANDL<= L<= S1 S2

ANDL<> L<> S1 S2

App. 4-12
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

ORL= L= S1 S2

ORL> L> S1 S2

Performs OR operation of (S1


Double Real ORL< L< S1 S2
+1,S1) & (S2+1,S2) Compare
Number Result and Bit Result(BR), and

Compare then saves its result in BR
(OR) ORL>= L>= S1 S2
(Signed Operation)

ORL<= L<= S1 S2

ORL<> L<> S1 S2

LOAD$= $= S1 S2

LOAD$> $> S1 S2

String LOAD$< $< S1 S2 Compares (S1) to (S2) Starting


Compare String and saves its result in Bit
(LOAD) LOAD$>= $>= S1 S2 Result(BR)

LOAD$<= $<= S1 S2

LOAD$<> $<> S1 S2

AND$= $= S1 S2

AND$> $> S1 S2

AND$< Performs AND operation of (S 1)


String $< S1 S2
& (S2) Starting String Compare
Compare
Result and Bit Result(BR), and
(AND) AND$>= $>= S1 S2
then saves its result in BR

AND$<= $<= S1 S2

AND$<> $<> S1 S2

App. 4-13
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

OR$= $= S1 S2

OR$> $> S1 S2

Performs OR operation of (S1)


String OR$< $< S1 S2 & (S2) Starting String Compare
Compare Result and Bit Result(BR), and
(OR) then saves its result in BR
OR$>= $>= S1 S2

OR$<= $<= S1 S2

OR$<> $<> S1 S2

LOADG= G= S1 S2 N

LOADG> G> S1 S2 N
Compares (S1), (S1+1), ,
16 Bits LOADG< G< S1 S2 N (S1+N) to (S2), (S2+1), ,
Data (S2+N) 1 to 1, and then saves

Group Compare LOADG>= G>= S1 S2 N 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each
(LOAD) value compared meets given
condition
LOADG<= G<= S1 S2 N

LOADG<> G<> S1 S2 N

ANDG= G= S1 S1 N

ANDG> G> S1 S1 N
Performs AND operation of
16 Bits ANDG< G< S1 S1 N
(S1), (S1+1), , (S1+N) &
Data (S2), (S2+1), , (S2+N) 1 to

Group Compare 1 Compare Result and Bit
(AND) ANDG>= G>= S1 S1 N
Result (BR), and then saves its
result in BR
ANDG<= G<= S1 S1 N

ANDG<> G<> S1 S1 N

ORG= G= S1 S2 N

ORG> G> S1 S2 N

Performs OR operation of (S1),


16 Bits ORG< G< S1 S2 N (S1+1), , (S1+N) & (S2),
Data (S2+1), , (S2+N) 1 to 1

Group Compare Compare Result and Bit Result
(OR) ORG>= G>= S1 S2 N (BR), and then saves its result
in BR

ORG<= G<= S1 S2 N

ORG<> G<> S1 S2 N

App. 4-14
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGX XGB
LOADDG= DG= S1 S2 N

LOADDG> DG> S1 S2 N
Compares (S1), (S1+1), ,
32 Bits
LOADDG< DG< S1 S2 N (S1+N) to (S2), (S2+1), ,
Data
(S2+N) 1 to 1, and then saves
Group
LOADDG>= DG>= S1 S2 N 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each
Compare value compared meets given
(LOAD) condition
LOADDG<= DG<= S1 S2 N

LOADDG<> DG<> S1 S2 N

ANDDG= DG= S1 S1 N

ANDDG> DG> S1 S1 N
Performs AND operation of
32 Bits
ANDDG< (S1), (S1+1), , (S1+N) &
Data DG< S1 S1 N
(S2), (S2+1), , (S2+N) 1 to
Group
1 Compare Result and Bit
Compare ANDDG>= DG>= S1 S1 N
Result(BR), and then saves its
(AND) result in BR
ANDDG<= DG<= S1 S1 N

ANDDG<> DG<> S1 S1 N

ORDG= DG= S1 S2 N

ORDG> DG> S1 S2 N

Performs OR operation of
32 Bits
ORDG< DG< S1 S2 N (S1), (S1+1), , (S1+N) &
Data
(S2), (S2+1), , (S2+N) 1 to
Group
1 Compare Result and Bit
Compare Result(BR), and then saves its
ORDG>= DG>= S1 S2 N
(OR) result in BR

ORDG<= DG<= S1 S2 N

ORDG<> DG<> S1 S2 N

App. 4-15
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
LOAD3= 3= S1 S2 S3

LOAD3> 3> S1 S2 S3

Three 16-Bit LOAD3< 3< S1 S2 S3 Saves 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each


Data Compare value of (S1), (S2), (S3) meets
(LOAD) LOAD3>= 3>= S1 S2 S3 given condition

LOAD3<= 3<= S1 S2 S3

LOAD3<> 3<> S1 S2 S3

AND3= 3= S1 S2 S3

AND3> 3> S1 S2 S3
Performs AND operation of (S1),
Three 16-Bit AND3< 3< S1 S2 S3 (S2), (S3) Compare Result by
Data Compare given condition and Bit Result
(AND) AND3>= 3>= S1 S2 S3 (BR), and then saves its result in
BR
AND3<= 3<= S1 S2 S3

AND3<> 3<> S1 S2 S3

OR3= 3= S1 S2 S3

OR3> 3> S1 S2 S3

Performs OR operation of (S1),


Three 32-Bit OR3< <3 S1 S2 S3 (S2), (S3) Compare Result by
Data Compare given condition and Bit Result
(OR) OR3>= >=3 S1 S2 S3
(BR), and then saves its result in
BR

OR3<= 3<= S1 S2 S3

OR3<> 3<> S1 S2 S3

LOADD3= D3= S1 S2 S3

LOADD3> D3> S1 S2 S3

Three 16-Bit LOADD3< D3< S1 S2 S3 Saves 1 in Bit Result(BR) if each


Data Compare value of (S1+1,S1), (S2+ 1,S2),
(LOAD) LOADD3>= D3>= S1 S2 S3 (S3+1,S3) meets given condition

LOADD3<= D3<= S1 S2 S3

LOADD3<> D3<> S1 S2 S3

App. 4-16
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Comparison instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
ANDD3= D3= S1 S2 S3

ANDD3> D3> S1 S2 S3

Performs AND operation of (S1+


Three 32-Bit ANDD3< D3< S1 S2 S3 1,S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) Compare
Data Compare Result by given condition and Bit
(AND) ANDD3>= D3>= S1 S2 S3 Result (BR), and then saves its
result in BR
ANDD3<= D3<= S1 S2 S3

ANDD<> D3<> S1 S2 S3

ORD3= D3= S1 S2 S3

ORD3> D3> S1 S2 S3

Performs OR operation of (S1+1,


ORD3<
Three 32-Bit D3< S1 S2 S3 S1), (S2+1,S2), (S3+1,S3) Compare
Data Compare Result by given condition and Bit
(OR) Result (BR), and then saves its
ORD3>= D3>= S1 S2 S3 result in BR

ORD3<= D3<= S1 S2 S3

ORD3<> D3<> S1 S2 S3

App. 4-17
Appendix 4 Instruction List

5) Increase/Decrease instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
INC INC D
(D)+1 (D) 2
INCP INCP D
4-94
DINC DINC D
BIN Data (D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D) 2
Increase DINCP DINCP D
/
Decrease DEC DEC D
(Signed) (D)-1 (D) 2
DECP DECP D
4-96
DDEC DDEC D
(D+1,D)-1 (D+1,D) 2
DDECP DDECP D

INC4 INC4 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) + 1 2

INC4P INC4P Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) 3


4-95
INC8 INC8 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8) + 1 2
4/8 Bits Data (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8)
Increase INC8P INC8P Db 3
/
Decrease DEC4 DEC4 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4) - 1 2
(Signed)
(D:x bit ~ D:x bit+4)
DEC4P DEC4P Db 3
4-97
DEC8 DEC8 Db (D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8) - 1 2
(D:x bit ~ D:x bit+8)
DEC8P DEC8P Db 3

INCU INCU D
(D)+1 (D)
2
INCUP INCUP D
4-98
DINCU DINCU D
(D+1,D)+1 (D+1,D)
BIN Data 2
Increase DINCUP DINCUP D
/
Decrease DECU DECU D
(D)-1 (D)
(Unsigned) 2
DECUP DECUP D
4-99
DDECU DDECU D
(D+1,D)-1 (D+1,D)
2
DDECUP DDECUP D

App. 4-18
Appendix 4 Instruction List

6) Rotation instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
ROL ROL D n
b15 b0
CY D
ROLP ROLP D n
Rotate to Left
DROL DROL D n b31 b15 b0
CY D+1 D
DROLP DROLP D n

ROL4 ROL4 Db n b+3 b


CY D
ROL4P ROL4P Db n
4/8 Bits

Rotate to Left
ROL8 ROL8 Db n b+7 b
CY D
ROL8P ROL8P Db n

ROR ROR D n
b15 b0
D CY
RORP RORP D n
Rotate to Right
DROR DROR D n b31 b15 b0
D+1 D CY
DRORP DRORP D n
b+3 b
ROR4 ROR4 Db n D CY

ROR4P ROR4P Db n
4/8 Bits

Rotate to Right b+7 b
ROR8 ROR8 Db n D CY

ROR8P ROR8P Db n

RCL RCL D n
b15 b0
CY D
Rotate to Left RCLP RCLP D n
(including
Carry) DRCL DRCL D n b31 b15 b0
CY D+1 D
DRCLP DRCLP D n
b+3 b
RCL4 RCL4 Db n CY D
4/8 Bits
RCL4P RCL4P Db n
Rotate to Left

(including b+7 b
RCL8 RCL8 Db n D
Carry) CY

RCL8P RCL8P Db n

RCR RCR D n
b15 b0
Rotate D CY
RCRP RCRP D n
to Right

(including
DRCR DRCR D n b31 b15 b0
Carry) D+1 D CY
DRCRP DRCRP D n
b+3 b
RCR4 RCR4 Db n D CY

4/8 Bits
RCR4P RCR4P Db n
Rotate to Right

(including b+7 b
RCR8 RCR8 Db n D
Carry) CY

RCR8P RCR8P Db n

App. 4-19
Appendix 4 Instruction List

7) Move instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
St Ed
BSFT BSFT St Ed b15 b0
Bits Move
BSFTP BSFTP St Ed
0

b15 b0
BSFL BSFL D n
(D)

BSFLP BSFLP D n CY 0
Move to Higher

Bit b31 b0
DBSFL DBSFL D n
(D+1, D)
DBSFLP DBSFLP D n CY 0

b+3 b
BSFL4 BSFL4 Db n
D

Move to Higher BSFL4P BSFL4P Db n CY 0


Bit within 4/8
b+7 b
Bits range BSFL8 BSFL8 Db n
D

BSFL8P BSFL8P Db n CY 0

b15 b0
BSFR BSFR D n (D)

0
BSFRP BSFRP D n CY
Move to Lower

Bit b31 b0
DBSFR DBSFR D n (D+1, D)
0
DBSFRP DBSFRP D n CY

b+3 b
BSFR4 BSFR4 Db n D

0 CY
Move to Lower BSFR4P BSFR4P Db n
Bit within 4/8 b+7 b
Bits range BSFR8 BSFR8 Db n D

CY
BSFR8P BSFR8P Db n 0

WSFT WSFT Et Ed h0000 St (Start Word)

Word Move ..
Ed (End Word)
WSFTP WSFTP Et Ed

WSFL WSFL D1 D2 N h0000 D1


..
N

D2
Word Data WSFLP WSFLP D1 D2 N
Move to
Left/Right WSFR WSFR D1 D2 N D1
..
N

h0000 D2
WSFRP WSFRP D1 D2 N

Moves N bits starting from Db bit


Bit Move SR SR Db I D N along Input direction (I) and Move
direction (D)

App. 4-20
Appendix 4 Instruction List

8) Exchange instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

XCHG XCHG D1 D2
(D1) (D2)
XCHGP XCHGP D1 D2
Data

Exchange
DXCHG DXCHG D1 D2
(D1+1, D1) (D2+1, D2)
DXCHGP DXCHGP D1 D2

Group GXCHG GXCHG D1 D2 N (D1) (D2)


Data : : N
Exchange GXCHGP GXCHGP D1 D2 N

b15 b0
Higher/Lower SWAP SWAP D (D) Upper Byte Lower Byte

Byte
Exchange (D) Lower Byte Upper Byte
SWAPP SWAPP D

Group GSWAP GSWAP D N


Exchanges Higher/Lower
Byte
Byte of Words N starting from D
Exchange GSWAPP GSWAPP D N

App. 4-21
Appendix 4 Instruction List

9) BIN operation instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

ADD ADD S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D)
ADDP ADDP S1 S2 D
Integer Addition

(Signed)
DADD DADD S1 S2 D
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DADDP DADDP S1 S2 D

SUB SUB S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D)
Integer SUBP SUBP S1 S2 D
Subtraction
(Signed) DSUB DSUB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DSUBP DSUBP S1 S2 D

MUL MUL S1 S2 D
(S1)(S2) (D+1,D)
Integer MULP MULP S1 S2 D
Multiplication
(Signed) DMUL DMUL S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
DMULP DMULP S1 S2 D

DIV DIV S1 S2 D (D) Quotient


(S1)(S2)
(D+1) Remainder
DIVP DIVP S1 S2 D
Integer Division

(Signed) (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
DDIV DDIV S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient
(D+3,D+2) Remainder
DDIVP DDIVP S1 S2 D

ADDU ADDU S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D)

ADDUP ADDUP S1 S2 D
Integer Addition

(Unsigned)
DADDU DADDU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DADDUP DADDUP S1 S2 D

SUBU SUBU S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D)

Integer SUBUP SUBUP S1 S2 D


Subtraction
(Unsigned) DSUBU DSUBU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DSUBUP DSUBUP S1 S2 D

MULU MULU S1 S2 D
(S1)(S2) (D+1,D)

Integer MULUP MULUP S1 S2 D


Multiplication
(Unsigned) DMULU DMULU S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
DMULUP DMULUP S1 S2 D

App. 4-22
Appendix 4 Instruction List

9) BIN operation instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

DIVU DIVU S1 S2 D
(D) Quotient
(S1)(S2)
(D+1) Remainder
DIVUP DIVUP S1 S2 D
Integer Division

(Unsigned) (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
DDIVU DDIVU S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient

DDIVUP DDIVUP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2) Remainder

RADD RADD S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)


(D+1,D)
RADDP RADDP S1 S2 D
Real Number

Addition (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LADD LADD S1 S2 D
+(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)

LADDP LADDP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RSUB RSUB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)


(D+1,D)
RSUBP RSUBP S1 S2 D
Real Number

Subtraction (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LSUB LSUB S1 S2 D
-(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)

LSUBP LSUBP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RMUL RMUL S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)


(D+1,D)
RMULP RMULP S1 S2 D
Real Number

Multiplication (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LMUL LMUL S1 S2 D
(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)

LMULP LMULP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

RDIV RDIV S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)


(D+1,D)
RDIVP RDIVP S1 S2 D
Real Number

Division (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
LDIV LDIV S1 S2 D
(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)

LDIVP LDIVP S1 S2 D (D+3,D+2,D+1,D)

$ADD $ADD S1 S2 D
String Connects S1 String with S2 String

Addition to save in D
$ADDP $ADDP S1 S2 D

(S1) (S2) (D)


GADD GADD S1 S2 D N
Group Addition + = N
GADDP GADDP S1 S2 D N

(S1) (S2) (D)


GSUB GSUB S1 S2 D N
Group
- = N
Subtraction
GSUBP GSUBP S1 S2 D N

App. 4-23
Appendix 4 Instruction List

10) BCD operation instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

ADDB ADDB S1 S2 D
(S1)+(S2) (D)
ADDBP ADDBP S1 S2 D
BCD Addition
DADDB DADDB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DADDBP DADDBP S1 S2 D

SUBB SUBB S1 S2 D
(S1)-(S2) (D)
SUBBP SUBBP S1 S2 D
BCD Subtraction
DSUBB DSUBB S1 S2 D
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
DSUBBP DSUBBP S1 S2 D

MULB MULB S1 S2 D
(S1)(S2) (D+1,D)
MULBP MULBP S1 S2 D
BCD

Multiplication
DMULB DMULB S1 S2 D (S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
DMULBP DMULBP S1 S2 D

DIVB DIVB S1 S2 D (D) Quotient


(S1)(S2)
(D+1) Remainder
DIVBP DIVBP S1 S2 D
BCD Division
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
DDIVB DDIVB S1 S2 D
(D+1,D) Quotient

(D+3,D+2) Remainder
DDIVBP DDIVBP S1 S2 D

App. 4-24
Appendix 4 Instruction List

11) Logic operation instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Page
Steps

WAND WAND S1 S2 D Word AND


(S1) (S2) (D)
WANDP WANDP S1 S2 D
Logic

Multiplication
DWAND DWAND S1 S2 D
DWord AND
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DWANDP DWANDP S1 S2 D

WOR WOR S1 S2 D
Word OR
(S1) (S2) (D)
WORP WORP S1 S2 D
Logic Addition
DWOR DWOR S1 S2 D DWord OR
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DWORP DWORP S1 S2 D

WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D
Word Exclusive OR
(S1) (S2) (D)
WXORP WXORP S1 S2 D
Exclusive

OR
DWXOR DWXOR S1 S2 D DWord Exclusive OR
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DWXORP DWXORP S1 S2 D

WXNR WXNR S1 S2 D
Word Exclusive NOR
(S1) (S2) (D)
WXNRP WXNRP S1 S2 D
Exclusive

NOR
DWXNR DWXNR S1 S2 D
DWord Exclusive NOR
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2) (D+1,D)
DWXNRP DWXNRP S1 S2 D

(S1) (S2) (D)


GWAND GWAND S1 S2 D N
= N
GWANDP GWANDP S1 S2 D N

(S1) (S2) (D)


GWOR GWOR S1 S2 D N
= N
GWORP GWORP S1 S2 D N
Group
Logic Operation (S1) (S2) (D)
GWXOR GWXOR S1 S2 D N
= N
GWXORP GWXORP S1 S2 D N

(S1) (S2) (D)


GWXNR GWXNR S1 S2 D N
= N
GWXNRP GWXNRP S1 S2 D N

App. 4-25
Appendix 4 Instruction List

12) Data process instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
b15 b0
BSUM BSUM S D S

1s number
BSUMP BSUMP S D D
Bit Check
b31 b15 b0
DBSUM DBSUM S D S S

1s number
DBSUMP DBSUMP S D D

BRST BRST D N
Bit Reset Resets N Bits (starting from D) to 0
BRSTP BRSTP D N

S D
ENCO ENCO S D n
... ...
Encode
N bits
ENCOP ENCOP S D n N
2 bits 2binary

S D
DECO DECO S D n
... ...
Decode
N bits
DECOP DECOP S D n
2binary 2N bits

DIS DIS S D n ... ... D


...
S .. D+1
D+N-1
Data DISP DISP S D n ...

Disconnect &
Connect UNI UNI S D n D ...
D+1
D+N-1
.. ...
S
...
UNIP UNIP S D n ...

S Lower D
WTOB
..
WTOB S D n Higher Lower h00
h00 Higher D+1
S+N-1 Higher Lower h00 Lower
Word/ WTOBP WTOBP S D n h00 Higher
Byte
Conversion BTOW BTOW S D n D h00 Lower Higher Lower
.. S
D+1 h00 Higher
h00 Lower Higher Lower S+N-1
BTOWP BTOWP S D n h00 Higher

IORF IORF S1 S2 S3 Right after masking I/O data (located


I/O
on S1) with S2 and S3 data, perform
Refresh
IORFP IORFP S1 S2 S3 process

SCH SCH S1 S2 D N

SCHP SCHP S1 S2 D N
Finds S1 value within S2 ~ N range
Data and saves the first identical valued

Search position in D and S1s identical valued
DSCH DSCH S1 S2 D N
total number in D+1

DSCHP DSCHP S1 S2 D N

MAX MAX S D n
Saves the max value in D among N
words starting from S
MAXP MAXP S D n
Max. Value

Search
DMAX DMAX S D n
Saves the max value in D among N
double words starting from S
DMAXP DMAXP S D n

App. 4-26
Appendix 4 Instruction List

12) Data process instruction (continued)

Designatio Support
Classification Symbol Description
ns XGK XGB

MIN MIN S D n
Saves the min value in D among N
words starting from S
MINP MINP S D n
Min. Value

Search
DMIN DMIN S D n
Saves the min value in D among N
double words starting from S
DMINP DMINP S D n

SUM SUM S D n
Adds up N words starting from S to
save in D
SUMP SUMP S D n
Sum
DSUM DSUM S D n
Adds up N double words starting
from S to save in D
DSUMP DSUMP S D n

AVE AVE S D n
Averages N words starting from S
to save in D
AVEP AVEP S D n
Average
DAVE DAVE S D n
Averages N double words starting
from S to save in D
DAVEP DAVEP S D n

MUX MUX S1 S2 D N S2 S1st data

N D

MUXP MUXP S1 S2 D N
MUX
DMUX DMUX S1 S2 D N S2+1 S2 S1st data

N D+1 D

DMUXP DMUXP S1 S2 D N

DETECT DETECT S1 S2 D N Detects N data from S1, to save the


Data
first value larger than S2 in D, and
Detect
DETECTP DETECTP S1 S2 D N the extra number in D+1

Saves linear-changed value in D1


during n3 scanning of initial value
Ramp Signal
RAMP RAMP n1 n2 D1 n3 D2 n1 to final n2 and present scanning
Output
number in D1+1, and changes D2
value to ON after completed

S : Head Address of Sort Data


SORT SORT S n1 n2 D1 D2 n1 : Number of Words to sort
Data n1+1 : Sorting Method

Align n2: Operation number per Scan
SORTP SORTP S n1 n2 D1 D2 D1 : ON if complete
D2 : Auxiliary Area

App. 4-27
Appendix 4 Instruction List

13) Data table process instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

FIWR FIWR S D Adds S to the last of Data Table D ~


Data
D+N, and increases Data Table
Write
FIWRP FIWRP S D Length(N) saved in D by 1

FIFRD FIFRD S D Moves first data, S+1 of Data Table


First-input
S ~ S+N to D (pull 1 place after origin
Data
deleted) and decreases Data Table
Read Length(N) saved in D by 1 S
FIFRDP FIFRDP S D

FILRD FILRD S D Moves last data, S+N of Data Table


Last-Input
S ~ S+N to D (origin deleted) and
Data
decreases Data Table Length(N)
Read
FILRDP FILRDP S D saved in D by 1 S

FIINS FINS S D n Adds S to Nth place of Data Table D


Data ~ D+N (origin data pulled by 1), and

Insert increases Data Table Length(N)
FIINSP FINSP S D n saved in D by 1

FIDEL FDEL S D n Deletes Nth data of Data Table S ~


Data S+N (pull 1 place) and decreases

Pull Data Table Length(N) saved in D by
FIDELP FDELP S D n 1

14) Display instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

SEG SEG S D Z
7 Segment Converts S Data to 7-Segment as

Display adjusted in Z Format so to save in D
SEGP SEGP S D Z

App. 4-28
Appendix 4 Instruction List

15) String Process instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

BINDA BINDA S D Converts S of 1-word BIN value to


Decimal ASCII Cord to save in
Convert to BINDAP BINDAP S D starting D
Decimal

ASCII
Cord DBINDA DBINDA S D Converts S of 2-word BIN value to
Decimal ASCII Cord to save in
DBINDAP DBINDAP S D starting D

BINHA BINHA S D Converts S of 1-word BIN value to


Hexadecimal ASCII Cord to save
Convert to BINHAP BINHAP S D in starting D
Hexadecimal

ASCII
Cord DBINHA DBINHA S D Converts S of 2-word BIN value to
Hexadecimal ASCII Cord to save in
DBINHAP DBINHAP S D starting D

BCDDA BCDDA S D
Converts S of 1-word BCD to ASCII
Convert BCD Cord to save in starting D
BCDDAP BCDDAP S D
to Decimal

ASCII
Cord DBCDDA DBCDDA S D
Converts S of 2-word BCD to ASCII
Cord to save in starting D
DBCDDAP DBCDDAP S D

DABIN DABIN S D
Converts S S+2,S+1,Ss Decimal
ASCII Cord to BIN to save in D
Convert DABINP DABINP S D
Decimal ASCII
to BIN DDABIN DDABIN S D Converts S+5~Ss Decimal ASCII
Cord to BIN value to save in D+1 &
DDABINP DDABINP S D D

HABIN HABIN S D
Converts S+1,Ss Hexadecimal ASCII
Cord to BIN value to save in D
Convert HABINP HABINP S D
Hexadecimal
ASCII to BIN DHABIN DHABIN S D
Converts S+3~Ss Hexadecimal ASCII
Cord to BIN to save in D
DHABINP DHABINP S D

DABCD DABCD S D
Converts S+1,Ss Decimal ASCII
Cord to BCD to save in D
Convert DABCDP DABCDP S D
Decimal ASCII
to BCD DDABCD DDABCD S D
Converts S+3~Ss Decimal ASCII
Cord to BCD to save in D
DDABCDP DDABCDP S D

LEN LEN S D
String Saves String Length with S starting

Length Detect in D
LENP LENP S D

App. 4-29
Appendix 4 Instruction List

15) String process instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

STR STR S1 S2 D
Adjusts S2 saved word
data to S1 saved place
number to convert to String
STRP STRP S1 S2 D
and save in D
Convert BIN16/32 to

String Adjusts S2 saved double
DSTR DSTR S1 S2 D
word data to S1 saved
place number to convert to
DSTRP DSTRP S1 S2 D
String and save in D

VAL VAL S D1 D2
Adjusts S saved string to
number to save in word
D1 and saves the place
VALP VALP S D1 D2
number in D2
Convert String to

BIN16/32 Adjusts S saved string to
DVAL DVAL S D1 D2
number to save in double
word D1 and saves the
DVALP DVALP S D1 D2
place number in D2
Adjusts Floating decimal
RSTR RSTR S1 S2 D
point point Real Number
Data (S1: number, S2:
RSTRP RSTRP S1 S2 D places) to String format to
Convert Real Number to save in D
X
String Adjusts Floating decimal
LSTR LSTR S1 S2 D
point point Double Real
Number Data (S1:number,
LSTRP LSTRP S1 S2 D S2:places) to String format
to save in D
STRR STRR S D Converts String S to Floating
decimal point point Real
Convert String to Real STRRP STRRP S D Number Data to save in D
Number X
STRL STRL S D
Converts String S to
Floating decimal point
point Double Real Number
STRLP STRLP S D
Data to save in D

ASC ASC S D cw
Converts BIN Data to
ASCII in Nibble unit,
ASCII Conversion
based on cws format from
ASCP ASCP S D cw
S to save in D
Converts 2N ASCII saved
HEX HEX S D N
in N words from S in byte
HEX Conversion unit to Nibble unit of
HEXP HEXP S D N Hexadecimal BIN so to
save in D
RIGHT RIGHT S D N Extracts n string from S
String Extract from
strings final letter to save
Right
RIGHTP RIGHTP S D N in starting D

LEFT LEFT S D N Extracts n string from S


String Extract from Left strings first letter to save
LEFTP LEFTP S D N in starting D

MID MID S1 S2 D
Extracts string which
conforms to S2 condition
String Random Extract
among S1 string to save in
MIDP MIDP S1 S2 D
starting D

App. 4-30
Appendix 4 Instruction List

15) String process instruction (continued)

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Page
Steps

REPLACE REPLACE S1 D S2 Processes S1 String as


String Random
applicable to S2 Condition to
Replace
REPLACEP REPLACEP S1 D S2 save in D String

FIND FIND S1 S2 D N Finds identical String to S2 in


String Find S1 ~ N data to save the
FINDP FINDP S1 S2 D N absolute position in D

RBCD RBCD S1 S2 D
Adjusts Floating decimal point
point Real Number Data S1 to
S2 place to convert to BCD,
RBCDP RBCDP S1 S2 D
and then to save in D
Parse Real
X
Number to BCD Adjusts Floating decimal point
LBCD LBCD S1 S2 D
point Double Real Number
Data S1 to S2 place to convert
LBCDP LBCDP S1 S2 D
to BCD, and then to save in D

BCDR BCDR S1 S2 D
Adjusts BCD Data S1 to S2
place to convert to Floating
decimal point point Real
Convert BCD BCDRP BCDRP S1 S2 D
Number, and then to save in D
Data to Real Adjusts BCD Data S1 to S2 X
Number BCDL BCDR S1 S2 D
place to convert to Floating
decimal point point Double
BCDLP BCDLP S1 S2 D Real Number, and then to
save in D

App. 4-31
Appendix 4 Instruction List

16) Special function instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Page
Steps

SIN SIN S D
SIN Operation SIN(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
SINP SINP S D

COS COS S D
COS
COS(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
Operation
COSP COSP S D

TAN TAN S D
TAN Operation TAN(S+1,S) (D+1,D)
TANP TANP S D

RAD RAD S D (S+1,S) (D+1,D)


RAD
Converts angle to radian
Conversion
RADP RADP S D

DEG DEG S D (S+1,S) (D+1,D)


Angle
Conversion Converts radian to angle
DEGP DEGP S D

SQRT SQRT S D
Square Root

Operation (S+1,S) (D+1,D)
SQRTP SQRTP S D

App. 4-32
Appendix 4 Instruction List

17) Data control instruction

Basic
Classification Designations Symbol Description Page
Steps

LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D

If S1 < S2, then


LIMITP LIMITP S1 S2 S3 D D = S2
Limit If S2 < S1 < S3, then

Control D = S1
DLIMIT DLIMIT S1 S2 S3 D If S3 < S1, then
D = S3
DLIMITP DLIMITP S1 S2 S3 D

DZONE DZONE S1 S2 S3 D

If S1 < -S2, then


DZONEP DZONEP S1 S2 S3 D D = S1+S2-S2(S3/100)
Dead-zone If S2 < S1 < S2, then

Control D = (S3/100)S1
DDZONE DDZONE S1 S2 S3 D If S1 < S2, then
D = S1-S2+S2(S3/100)
DDZONEP DDZONEP S1 S2 S3 D

VZONE VZONE S1 S2 S3 D
If S1 < -S2(S3/100), then
D = S1-S2+S2(S3/100)
VZONEP VZONEP S1 S2 S3 D
If S2(S3/100) <S1< S2(S3/100),
Vertical-zone
then
Control
D = (100/S3)S1
DVZONE DVZONE S1 S2 S3 D
If S1 < S2(S3/100), then
D = S1+S2-S2(S3/100)
DVZONEP DVZONEP S1 S2 S3 D

PIDRUN PIDRUN N Operates PID Loop N

Stops PID Loop N


PIDPAUSE PIDPAUSE N X
momentarily

Changes PID Loop Ns Parameter.


Built-in PIDPRMT PIDPRMT S N ( SV(word) / Ts(word) / Kp(real) X
PID Control / Ti(real) / Td(real) )
Instruction

PIDAT PIDRUN N Start of PID loop Auto-tuning X

PIDCAS PIDPRMT S N Start of PID loop cascade operation X

Start of PID loop combination


PIDHBD PIDPRMT S N X
operation

App. 4-33
Appendix 4 Instruction List

18) Time related instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

Date/Time DATERD DATERD D


Reads PLC Time to save in D ~ D+6
Data X
(Yr/Mn/Dt/Hr/Mn/Sd/Day)
Read DATERDP DATERDP D

Date/Time DATEWR DATEWR S Input


Data S ~ S+6s Time Data in PLC X
Write DATEWRP DATEWRP S (Yr/Mn/Dt/Hr/Mn/Sd/Day)

ADDCLK ADDCLK S1 S2 D
Adds S1 ~ S1+2 & S2 ~ S2+2 Time
Time Data
Data to save in D ~ D+2 in Time X
Increase
Data format (Hr/Mn/Sd)
ADDCLKP ADDCLKP S1 S2 D

SUBCLK SUBCLK S1 S2 D
Extracts S2 ~ S2+2s Time Data from
Time Data
S1 ~ S1+2 to save in D ~ D+2 in X
Decrease
Time Data format (Hr/Mn/Sd)
SUBCLKP SUBCLKP S1 S2 D

SECOND SECOND S D
Converts Time Data S ~ S+2 to
X
seconds to save in double word D
Time Data SECONDP SECONDP S D

Format
Conversion HOUR HOUR S D
Converts the seconds saved in
double word S to Hr/Mn/Sd to save X
in D ~ D+2
HOURP HOURP S D

19) Divergence instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

JMP JMP LABEL Jumps to LABEL location


Divergence

Instruction Jumps and designates the location
LABEL LABEL
to move to

CALL CALL LABEL

Calls Function applicable to LABEL


CALLP CALLP LABEL
Subroutine

Call Functional Designates Function to be called by
SBRT SBRT LABEL
CALL

RET RET RETURN

App. 4-34
Appendix 4 Instruction List

20) Loop instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

FOR FOR N
Operates FOR~NEXT section n

Loop times
NEXT NEXT
Instruction
BREAK BREAK Escapes from FOR~NEXT section

21) Flag instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

Carry STC STC Carry Flag ( F0112 ) SET


Flag Set,
Reset CLC CLC Carry Flag ( F0112 ) RESET
Error Flag
CLE CLE Error Latch Flag (F0115) RESET
Clear

22) System instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Self Diagnosis
Error Display FALS FALS n
(Error Display )
On during n1 Scan, Off during n2
Scan Cluck DUTY DUTY D n1 n2
Scan

D1 S1 S2 D2 On during S1 set time, Off during S2


Time Cluck TFLK TFLK
set time

WDT WDT
WDT
Watch Dog Timer Clear
Initialize
WDTP WDTP

Output Control OUTOFF OUTOFF All Output Off


Finishes applicable scan to end PLC
Operation Stop STOP STOP
Operation
Emergent Ends PLC operation right after
ESTOP ESTOP
Operation Stop Instruction executed

23) Interrupt related instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

All Channels EI EI All Channels Interrupt allowed


Interrupt
Setting DI DI All Channel Interrupt prohibited
Individual
EIN EIN N Individual Channel Interrupt allowed
Channel

Interrupt
DIN DIN N Individual Channel Interrupt prohibited
Setting

App. 4-35
Appendix 4 Instruction List

24) Sign reversion instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

NEG NEG D
Saves D value again in D with 2s
complement taken
NEGP NEGP D
2s

complement
DNEG DNEG D Saves (D+1,D) value again in
(D+1,D) with 2s complement
DNEGP DNEGP D taken

RNEG RNEG D
Reverses D Real Number Sign then
to save again
Real Number RNEGP RNEGP D
Data Sign
Reverse LNEGR LNEG D
Reverses D Double Real Number
Sign then to save again
LNEGP LNEGP D

ABS ABS D
Converts D highest Bit to 0
ABSP ABSP D
Absolute Value

Operation
DABS DABS D
Converts (D+1,D)
highest Bit to 0
DABSP DABSP D

25) File related instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

RSET RSET S
Block Changes Block Number of file register
X
Conversion to S Number
RSETP RSETP S

Flash EMOV EMOV S1 S2 D


Transfers S2 word data in S1 Block
Word Data
to D
Transfer EMOVP EMOVP S1 S2 D

o X
Flash EDMOV EDMOV S1 S2 D
Double Word Transfers S2+1, S2 double word data
Data in S1 Block to D+1, D
Transfer EDMOVP EDMOVP S1 S2 D

Block Read EBREAD EBREAD S1 S2 Reads Flash Memory Block X

Block Write EBWRITE EBWRITE S1 S2 Writes Flash Memory Block X

Block Compares R Areas Bank with Flash


EBCMP EBCMP S1 S2 D1 D2 X
Compare Areas Block

App. 4-36
Appendix 4 Instruction List

Appendix 4.4 Special/Communication Instruction


1) Communication module related instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Sets opposite station No. for P2P
Station No. Set P2PSN P2PSN n1 n2 n3 Communication. n1:P2P No., X
n2:Block, n3:Station No.
Sets word data Read Area
Read Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PWRD P2PWRD n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 X
(WORD) sequence, n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets word data Write Area


Write Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PWWR P2PWWR n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 X
(WORD) sequence, n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets bit data Read Area


Read Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PBRD P2PBRD n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 X
(BIT) sequence, n4: Variable Size,
n5:Device

Sets bit data Write Area


Write Area Set n1:P2P No., n2:Block, n3:Variable
P2PBWR P2PBWR n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 X
(BIT) sequence,n4:Variable Size,
n5:Device

2) Special module common instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

GET GET sl S D N
Reads data of special module

memory is installed on
Special GETP GETP sl S D N

Module
Read/Write PUT PUT sl S1 S2 N
Writes data on special module

memory is installed on
PUTP PUTP sl S1 S2 N

App. 4-37
Appendix 4 Instruction List

3) Exclusive positioning instruction

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Return to Origin
ORG ORG sl ax axis installed on sl slot to return to
Point
Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Floating Origin
FLT FLT sl ax axis installed on sl slot to set
Point
Floating Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
axis installed on sl slot to start
Direct Start DST DST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 directly with Target Position(n1),
Target Speed(n2), Dwell Time(n3),
M Code(n4) & Control Word(n5)
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Indirect Start IST IST sl ax n axis installed on sl slot to start n
step indirectly

Instructions Positioning Modules ax


Linear
LIN LIN sl ax n1 n2 axis installed on sl slot to let n2 axes
Interpolation
operate n1 step by Linear Interpolation

Instructions Positioning Modules ax


Circular
CIN CIN sl ax n1 n2 axis installed on sl slot to let n2 axes X
Interpolation
operate n1 step by Circular Interpolation

Instructions Positioning Modules ax


Simultaneous axis installed on sl slot to let n4 axes
SST SST sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4
Start operate n1(X), n2(Y), n3(Z) steps by
Simultaneous Start
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Speed/Position axis installed on sl slot to switch
VTP VTP sl ax
Control Switch Speed to Position
Control
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Position/Speed
PTV PTV sl ax axis installed on sl slot to switch
Control Switch
Position to Speed Control
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Decelerated Stop STP STP sl ax axis installed on sl slot to stop as
decelerated.

Instructions Positioning Modules ax


Skip SKP SKP sl ax X
axis installed on sl slot to skip

Instructions Positioning Modules ax


axis installed on sl slot to do
Position
SSP SSP sl ax n1 n2 n3 Position Sync with main axis of n3,
Synchronization
n1 sync-positioned and n2 step
operated
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Speed axis installed on sl slot to do Speed
SSS SSS sl ax n1 n2 n3
Synchronization Sync with main axis of n3, n1
master and n2 slave
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
Position axis installed on sl slot to override
POR POR sl ax n
Override Position to change the target
position to n

App. 4-38
Appendix 4 Instruction List

4) Exclusive position control instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Speed
SOR SOR sl ax n installed on sl slot to override Speed to
Override
change the target speed to n

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Position specified
installed on sl slot to override position
Speed PSO PSO sl ax n
specified speed to change the target speed
Override
to n2 from n1 position

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Continuous
NMV NMV sl ax installed on sl slot to operate continuously X
Operation
to n step

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Inching INCH INCH sl ax n
installed on sl slot to inch to n position

Return to Position Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Previous to Manual RTP RTP sl ax installed on sl slot to return to position X
Operation previous to manual operation

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Operation
SNS SNS sl ax n installed on sl slot to change operation step
Step Change to n

Repeated Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Operation SRS SRS sl ax n installed on sl slot to change repeated X
Step Change operation step to n

M Code Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


MOF MOF sl ax
Off installed on sl slot to make M code off

Present Position Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis to


PRS PRS sl ax n
Change change present position to n

Zone Allows zone output of Positioning Module


ZOE ZOE sl ax X
Allowed installed on sl slot

Zone Prohibits zone output of Positioning Module


ZOD ZOD sl ax X
Prohibited installed on sl slot

Encoder Value Changes Encoder Value of Positioning


EPRS EPRS sl ax n X
change Module installed on sl slot to n

Changes n1 steps target position or speed


Teaching TEA TEA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 of Positioning Modules ax axis installed X
on sl slot

Changes multiple target positions or speed


Teaching
TEAA TEAA sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 of Positioning Modules ax axis installed X
Array
on sl slot

Instructions Positioning Module installed on


Emergent Stop EMG EMG sl ax
sl slot to perform Emergent Stop

App. 4-39
Appendix 4 Instruction List

5) Exclusive position control instruction (continued)

Support
Classification Designations Symbol Description
XGK XGB

Resets Error originated from Positioning


Error Reset CLR CLR sl ax n
Modules ax axis installed on sl slot

Error Deletes Error History originated from


History ECLR ECLR sl ax Positioning Modules ax axis installed on X
Reset sl slot

Point Performs Point Operation of Positioning


PST PST sl ax n X
Operation Modules ax axis installed on sl slot

Changes n2 to n1 among basic


Basic Parameter
TBP TBP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Modules ax X
Teaching
axis installed on sl slot

Extended Changes n2 to n1 among extended


Parameter TEP TEP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Modules ax X
Teaching axis installed on sl slot

Return to Origin Changes n2 to n1 among returned


Point Parameter THP THP sl ax n1 n2 parameters to origin point of Positioning X
Teaching Modules ax axis installed on sl slot

Manual Changes n2 to n1 among manual


Operation
TMP TMP sl ax n1 n2 operation parameters of Positioning X
Parameter
Teaching Modules ax axis installed on sl slot

Input Signal Changes input signal parameter of


Parameter TSP TSP sl ax n Positioning Modules ax axis installed on X
Teaching sl slot to the value set in n1

Common Changes n2 to n1 among common


Parameter TCP TCP sl ax n1 n2 parameters of Positioning Module X
Teaching installed on sl slot

Instructions Positioning Modules ax axis


Parameter
WRT WRT sl ax n installed on sl slot to save present
Save
parameter of n axis in flash ROM.

Reads and saves present state of


Present State
SRD SRD sl ax D Positioning Modules ax axis installed on X
Read
sl slot in D area of CPU

Writes value of S area of CPU on point


Point Operation
PWR PWR sl ax S n1 operation step area of Positioning X
Step Write
Modules ax axis installed on sl slot in

Plural Teaching Writes n value of S area of CPU on plural


Data TWR TWR sl ax S n1 teaching dada area of Positioning X
Write Modules ax axis installed on sl slot in

App. 4-40
Warranty

1. Warranty Period
The product you purchased will be guaranteed for 18 months from the date of manufacturing.

2. Scope of Warranty
Any trouble or defect occurring for the above-mentioned period will be partially replaced or repaired. However,
please note the following cases will be excluded from the scope of warranty.

(1) Any trouble attributable to unreasonable condition, environment or handling otherwise specified in the
manual,
(2) Any trouble attributable to others products,
(3) If the product is modified or repaired in any other place not designated by the company,
(4) Due to unintended purposes
(5) Owing to the reasons unexpected at the level of the contemporary science and technology when delivered.
(6) Not attributable to the company; for instance, natural disasters or fire

3. Since the above warranty is limited to PLC unit only, make sure to use the product considering the safety for
system configuration or applications.

Environmental Policy

LS Industrial Systems Co.,Ltd supports and observes the environmental policy as below.

Environmental Management About Disposal

LS Industrial Systems considers the LS Industrial Systems PLC unit is designed


environmental preservation as the to protect the environment. For the disposal,
preferential management subject and every separate aluminum, iron and synthetic resin
staff of LS Industrial Systems use the (cover) from the product as they are
reasonable endeavors for the pleasurably reusable.
environmental preservation of the earth.
LS values every single customers.
Quality and service come first at LSIS.
Always at your service, standing for our customers.

http://eng.lsis.biz

10310000693

HEAD OFFICE LS Industrial Systems Chengdu Office _ Chengdu, China


LS tower, Hogye-dong, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do 1026-6, Address : 12FL. Guodong Buiding. No.52 Jindun
Korea http://eng.lsis.biz Road Chengdu.610041. P.R. China
Tel : (82-2)2034-4870/Fax : 82-2-2034-4648 e-mail : [email protected] Tel : 86-28-8612-9151(9226)/Fax : 86-28-8612-9236 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems Tokyo Office _ Tokyo, Japan LS Industrial Systems Qingdao Office _ Qingdao, China
Address: 16FL. Higashi-Kan. Akasaka Twin Tower 17-22, Address : YinHe Bldg. 402 Room No. 2P Shandong Road,
Akasaka.Monato-ku Tokyo 107-8470. Japan Qingdao-City,Shandong-province 266071, P.R. China
Tel : 81-3-3582-9128/Fax : 81-3-3582-2667 e-mail : [email protected] Tel : 86-532-8501-6068/Fax : 86-532-8501-6057 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems(ME) FZE _ Dubai, U.A.E. LS Industrial Systems Europe B.V. , Netherlands
Address : Jafza View Tower Lob 19, Room 205 Along Sheikh Zayed Address : 1st. Floor, Tupolevlaan 48, 1119NZ, Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands
Road Jebel Aali Free Zone Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel : +31 (0)20 654 1420/Fax : +31 (0)20 654 1429 e-mail : [email protected]
Tel : 971-4-886-5360/Fax : 971-4-886-5361 e-mail : [email protected] Wuxi LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd _ Wuxi, China
LS Industrial Systems Shanghai Office _ Shanghai, China Address : 102-A. National High & New Tech Industrial Development Area.
Address : Room E-G. 12FL Hiamin Empire Plaza. No.726. West. Wuxi. Jiangsu. 214028. P.R. China
Yan'an Road Shanghai 200050. P.R. China e-mail : [email protected] Tel : 86-510-8534-6666/Fax : 86-510-8534-4078 e-mail : [email protected]
Tel : 86-21-5237-9977(609)/Fax : 89-21-5237-7189 Dalian LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. _ Dalian, China
LS Industrial Systems Beijing Office _ Beijing, China Address : No. 15. Liaohexi 3-Road. Economic and Technical Development zone.
Address : B-Tower 17FL. Beijing Global Trade Center B/D. No. 36. Dalian 116600. China
East BeisanHuan-Road. DongCheng-District. Beijing 100013. P.R. China Tel : 86-411-273-7777/Fax : 86-411-8730-7560 e-mail : [email protected]
Tel : 86-10-5825-6027(666)/Fax : 86-10-5825-6028 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems Guangzhou Office _ Guangzhou, China
Address : Room 1403.14FL. New Poly Tower.
2 Zhongshan Liu Road.Guangzhou.P.R China
Tel : 86-20-8328-6754/Fax : 86-20-8326-6287 e-mail : [email protected]

LS Industrial Systems constantly endeavors to improve its product so that 2010. 3


information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2010 All Rights Reserved.

You might also like